Home | History | Annotate | Download | only in info
      1 This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from
      2 ../../../toolchain/android-toolchain/binutils-2.17/ld/ld.texinfo.
      3 
      4 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      5 * Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
      6 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      7 
      8    This file documents the GNU linker LD version 2.17.
      9 
     10    Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
     11 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     12 
     13 
     14 File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)
     15 
     16 Using ld
     17 ********
     18 
     19 This file documents the GNU linker ld version 2.17.
     20 
     21    This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
     22 Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
     23 section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
     24 
     25 * Menu:
     26 
     27 * Overview::                    Overview
     28 * Invocation::                  Invocation
     29 * Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
     30 
     31 * Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
     32 
     33 * BFD::                         BFD
     34 
     35 * Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
     36 * MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
     37 * GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
     38 * Index::                       Index
     39 
     40 
     41 File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
     42 
     43 1 Overview
     44 **********
     45 
     46 `ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
     47 data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
     48 a program is to run `ld'.
     49 
     50    `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
     51 AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
     52 total control over the linking process.
     53 
     54    This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
     55 operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
     56 object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
     57 Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
     58 of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
     59 
     60    Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
     61 linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
     62 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
     63 `ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
     64 some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
     65 
     66 
     67 File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
     68 
     69 2 Invocation
     70 ************
     71 
     72 The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
     73 to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
     74 have many choices to control its behavior.
     75 
     76 * Menu:
     77 
     78 * Options::                     Command Line Options
     79 * Environment::                 Environment Variables
     80 
     81 
     82 File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation
     83 
     84 2.1 Command Line Options
     85 ========================
     86 
     87    The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
     88 practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
     89 a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
     90 standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
     91 `hello.o':
     92 
     93      ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
     94 
     95    This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
     96 linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
     97 which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
     98 discussion of the `-l' option below.)
     99 
    100    Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
    101 point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
    102 as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
    103 option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
    104 other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
    105 argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
    106 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
    107 option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
    108 noted in the descriptions below.
    109 
    110    Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
    111 linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
    112 command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
    113 placed between an option and its argument.
    114 
    115    Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
    116 can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
    117 script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
    118 specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
    119 message `No input files'.
    120 
    121    If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
    122 assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
    123 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
    124 linker script or the one specified by using `-T').  This feature
    125 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
    126 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
    127 `INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects.  Note that specifying a
    128 script in this way merely augments the main linker script; use the `-T'
    129 option to replace the default linker script entirely.  *Note Scripts::.
    130 
    131    For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
    132 either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
    133 given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
    134 requires them.
    135 
    136    For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
    137 can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
    138 `--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
    139 rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
    140 only be preceeded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
    141 `-o' option.  So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
    142 `magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
    143 
    144    Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
    145 the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
    146 immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
    147 `--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
    148 abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
    149 
    150    Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
    151 driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
    152 prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
    153 compiler driver) like this:
    154 
    155        gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
    156 
    157    This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
    158 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
    159 
    160    Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
    161 GNU linker:
    162 
    163 `@FILE'
    164      Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are
    165      inserted in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not
    166      exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
    167      literally, and not removed.
    168 
    169      Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
    170      character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
    171      option in either single or double quotes.  Any character
    172      (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
    173      to be included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain
    174      additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
    175      recursively.
    176 
    177 `-aKEYWORD'
    178      This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
    179      argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
    180      `default'.  `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
    181      and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
    182      `-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
    183 
    184 `-AARCHITECTURE'
    185 `--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
    186      In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
    187      Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that `ld' configuration, the
    188      ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
    189      the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
    190      archive-library search path.  *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
    191      i960, for details.
    192 
    193      Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
    194      other architecture families.
    195 
    196 `-b INPUT-FORMAT'
    197 `--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
    198      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
    199      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
    200      option to specify the binary format for input object files that
    201      follow this option on the command line.  Even when `ld' is
    202      configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
    203      usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
    204      expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
    205      machine.  INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
    206      format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the
    207      available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
    208 
    209      You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
    210      unusual binary format.  You can also use `-b' to switch formats
    211      explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
    212      including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
    213      particular format.
    214 
    215      The default format is taken from the environment variable
    216      `GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
    217      format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
    218      Commands::.
    219 
    220 `-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    221 `--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    222      For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
    223      files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
    224      described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce
    225      MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
    226      linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
    227      language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
    228      directories specified by any `-L' options.
    229 
    230 `-d'
    231 `-dc'
    232 `-dp'
    233      These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
    234      for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
    235      symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
    236      `-r').  The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
    237      effect.  *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    238 
    239 `-e ENTRY'
    240 `--entry=ENTRY'
    241      Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
    242      program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
    243      symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
    244      and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
    245      in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
    246      `0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
    247      and other ways of specifying the entry point.
    248 
    249 `--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
    250      Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
    251      not be automatically exported. The library names may be delimited
    252      by commas or colons.  Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
    253      symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This
    254      option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
    255      linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
    256      explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
    257      this option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
    258      option will be treated as hidden.
    259 
    260 `-E'
    261 `--export-dynamic'
    262      When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to
    263      the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the set of
    264      symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
    265 
    266      If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will
    267      normally contain only those symbols which are referenced by some
    268      dynamic object mentioned in the link.
    269 
    270      If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
    271      back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
    272      dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
    273      linking the program itself.
    274 
    275      You can also use the version script to control what symbols should
    276      be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
    277      it.  See the description of `--version-script' in *Note VERSION::.
    278 
    279 `-EB'
    280      Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
    281 
    282 `-EL'
    283      Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
    284      format.
    285 
    286 `-f'
    287 `--auxiliary NAME'
    288      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
    289      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    290      the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
    291      auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
    292 
    293      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    294      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
    295      field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
    296      object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
    297      shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
    298      the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
    299      not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
    300      alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
    301      debugging or for machine specific performance.
    302 
    303      This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
    304      entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
    305      command line.
    306 
    307 `-F NAME'
    308 `--filter NAME'
    309      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
    310      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    311      the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
    312      should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
    313      object NAME.
    314 
    315      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    316      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
    317      field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
    318      symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
    319      link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
    320      filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
    321      provided by the object NAME.
    322 
    323      Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
    324      toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
    325      output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
    326      this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
    327      `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
    328      environment variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
    329      when not creating an ELF shared object.
    330 
    331 `-fini NAME'
    332      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    333      the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
    334      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_fini'
    335      as the function to call.
    336 
    337 `-g'
    338      Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
    339 
    340 `-GVALUE'
    341 `--gpsize=VALUE'
    342      Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
    343      register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
    344      such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
    345      into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
    346      formats.
    347 
    348 `-hNAME'
    349 `-soname=NAME'
    350      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
    351      field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
    352      shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
    353      executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
    354      shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
    355      using the file name given to the linker.
    356 
    357 `-i'
    358      Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
    359 
    360 `-init NAME'
    361      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    362      the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
    363      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_init'
    364      as the function to call.
    365 
    366 `-lARCHIVE'
    367 `--library=ARCHIVE'
    368      Add archive file ARCHIVE to the list of files to link.  This
    369      option may be used any number of times.  `ld' will search its
    370      path-list for occurrences of `libARCHIVE.a' for every ARCHIVE
    371      specified.
    372 
    373      On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
    374      libraries with extensions other than `.a'.  Specifically, on ELF
    375      and SunOS systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library with
    376      an extension of `.so' before searching for one with an extension of
    377      `.a'.  By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.
    378 
    379      The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
    380      it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
    381      symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
    382      the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
    383      appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined
    384      symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
    385      cause the linker to search the archive again.
    386 
    387      See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
    388      archives multiple times.
    389 
    390      You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
    391 
    392      This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
    393      However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
    394      from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
    395 
    396 `-LSEARCHDIR'
    397 `--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
    398      Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
    399      archive libraries and `ld' control scripts.  You may use this
    400      option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
    401      order in which they are specified on the command line.
    402      Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
    403      default directories.  All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
    404      regardless of the order in which the options appear.
    405 
    406      If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
    407      "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
    408 
    409      The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
    410      `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
    411      cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
    412 
    413      The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
    414      `SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
    415      at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
    416      line.
    417 
    418 `-mEMULATION'
    419      Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
    420      emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
    421 
    422      If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
    423      `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
    424 
    425      Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
    426      configured.
    427 
    428 `-M'
    429 `--print-map'
    430      Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
    431      information about the link, including the following:
    432 
    433         * Where object files are mapped into memory.
    434 
    435         * How common symbols are allocated.
    436 
    437         * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
    438           the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
    439 
    440         * The values assigned to symbols.
    441 
    442           Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
    443           which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
    444           symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
    445           This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
    446           only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
    447           circumstances the linker will display the final value
    448           enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker
    449           script containing:
    450 
    451                   foo = 1
    452                   foo = foo * 4
    453                   foo = foo + 8
    454 
    455           will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
    456           option is used:
    457 
    458                   0x00000001                foo = 0x1
    459                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
    460                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
    461 
    462           See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
    463           expressions in linker scripts.
    464 
    465 `-n'
    466 `--nmagic'
    467      Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
    468      `NMAGIC' if possible.
    469 
    470 `-N'
    471 `--omagic'
    472      Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
    473      do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
    474      shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
    475      numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
    476      text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
    477      to the format specification published by Microsoft.
    478 
    479 `--no-omagic'
    480      This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option.  It
    481      sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
    482      to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
    483      against shared libraries.  Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
    484 
    485 `-o OUTPUT'
    486 `--output=OUTPUT'
    487      Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
    488      option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default.  The
    489      script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
    490 
    491 `-O LEVEL'
    492      If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
    493      output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
    494      probably should only be enabled for the final binary.
    495 
    496 `-q'
    497 `--emit-relocs'
    498      Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked
    499      exececutables.  Post link analysis and optimization tools may need
    500      this information in order to perform correct modifications of
    501      executables.  This results in larger executables.
    502 
    503      This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
    504 
    505 `--force-dynamic'
    506      Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
    507      specific to VxWorks targets.
    508 
    509 `-r'
    510 `--relocatable'
    511      Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
    512      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  This is often called "partial
    513      linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
    514      Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
    515      number to `OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
    516      file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
    517      not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
    518 
    519      When an input file does not have the same format as the output
    520      file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
    521      not contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have
    522      further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
    523      not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
    524      all.
    525 
    526      This option does the same thing as `-i'.
    527 
    528 `-R FILENAME'
    529 `--just-symbols=FILENAME'
    530      Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
    531      relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
    532      file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
    533      in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
    534 
    535      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
    536      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
    537      treated as the `-rpath' option.
    538 
    539 `-s'
    540 `--strip-all'
    541      Omit all symbol information from the output file.
    542 
    543 `-S'
    544 `--strip-debug'
    545      Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
    546      output file.
    547 
    548 `-t'
    549 `--trace'
    550      Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
    551 
    552 `-T SCRIPTFILE'
    553 `--script=SCRIPTFILE'
    554      Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces `ld''s
    555      default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
    556      must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
    557      *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
    558      directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
    559      preceding `-L' options.  Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
    560 
    561 `-u SYMBOL'
    562 `--undefined=SYMBOL'
    563      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
    564      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
    565      modules from standard libraries.  `-u' may be repeated with
    566      different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
    567      This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
    568 
    569 `-Ur'
    570      For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
    571      `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
    572      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
    573      `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'.  It
    574      does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
    575      with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
    576      be added to.  Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
    577      for the others.
    578 
    579 `--unique[=SECTION]'
    580      Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
    581      SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
    582      for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
    583      specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
    584      multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal
    585      merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
    586      section assignments in a linker script.
    587 
    588 `-v'
    589 `--version'
    590 `-V'
    591      Display the version number for `ld'.  The `-V' option also lists
    592      the supported emulations.
    593 
    594 `-x'
    595 `--discard-all'
    596      Delete all local symbols.
    597 
    598 `-X'
    599 `--discard-locals'
    600      Delete all temporary local symbols.  For most targets, this is all
    601      local symbols whose names begin with `L'.
    602 
    603 `-y SYMBOL'
    604 `--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
    605      Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
    606      option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
    607      necessary to prepend an underscore.
    608 
    609      This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
    610      link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
    611 
    612 `-Y PATH'
    613      Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
    614      for Solaris compatibility.
    615 
    616 `-z KEYWORD'
    617      The recognized keywords are:
    618     `combreloc'
    619           Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
    620           dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
    621 
    622     `defs'
    623           Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
    624           symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
    625 
    626     `execstack'
    627           Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
    628 
    629     `initfirst'
    630           This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
    631           It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
    632           occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
    633           brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
    634           runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
    635           runtime finalization of any other objects.
    636 
    637     `interpose'
    638           Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
    639           symbols but the primary executable.
    640 
    641     `loadfltr'
    642           Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
    643           runtime.
    644 
    645     `muldefs'
    646           Allows multiple definitions.
    647 
    648     `nocombreloc'
    649           Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
    650 
    651     `nocopyreloc'
    652           Disables production of copy relocs.
    653 
    654     `nodefaultlib'
    655           Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
    656           object will ignore any default library search paths.
    657 
    658     `nodelete'
    659           Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
    660 
    661     `nodlopen'
    662           Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
    663 
    664     `nodump'
    665           Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
    666 
    667     `noexecstack'
    668           Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
    669 
    670     `norelro'
    671           Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
    672           object.
    673 
    674     `now'
    675           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    676           tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
    677           program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
    678           using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
    679           to the point when the function is first called.
    680 
    681     `origin'
    682           Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
    683 
    684     `relro'
    685           Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
    686 
    687 
    688      Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
    689 
    690 `-( ARCHIVES -)'
    691 `--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
    692      The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be
    693      either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
    694 
    695      The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
    696      undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is
    697      searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
    698      command line.  If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
    699      undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
    700      appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
    701      resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be
    702      searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
    703 
    704      Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
    705      to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
    706      between two or more archives.
    707 
    708 `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    709 `--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
    710      Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
    711      recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
    712      doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
    713      This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
    714      2.14.  The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
    715      reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    716      option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
    717 
    718 `--as-needed'
    719 `--no-as-needed'
    720      This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
    721      mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
    722      Normally, the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
    723      library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
    724      library is actually needed.  `--as-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags
    725      to only be emitted for libraries that satisfy some symbol
    726      reference from regular objects which is undefined at the point
    727      that the library was linked.  `--no-as-needed' restores the
    728      default behaviour.
    729 
    730 `--add-needed'
    731 `--no-add-needed'
    732      This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
    733      DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line
    734      after the `--no-add-needed' option.  Normally, the linker will add
    735      a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
    736      `--no-add-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted for
    737      those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. `--add-needed' restores the
    738      default behaviour.
    739 
    740 `-assert KEYWORD'
    741      This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
    742 
    743 `-Bdynamic'
    744 `-dy'
    745 `-call_shared'
    746      Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    747      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option
    748      is normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants
    749      of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
    750      may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
    751      library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
    752 
    753 `-Bgroup'
    754      Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
    755      section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
    756      object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
    757      `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
    758      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    759 
    760 `-Bstatic'
    761 `-dn'
    762 `-non_shared'
    763 `-static'
    764      Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    765      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
    766      variants of this option are for compatibility with various
    767      systems.  You may use this option multiple times on the command
    768      line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
    769      it.  This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
    770      This option can be used with `-shared'.  Doing so means that a
    771      shared library is being created but that all of the library's
    772      external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
    773      static libraries.
    774 
    775 `-Bsymbolic'
    776      When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
    777      to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
    778      is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
    779      override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
    780      only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    781 
    782 `--check-sections'
    783 `--no-check-sections'
    784      Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
    785      been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
    786      linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
    787      will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
    788      and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
    789      behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
    790      `--check-sections'.
    791 
    792 `--cref'
    793      Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
    794      generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
    795      Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
    796 
    797      The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
    798      easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are
    799      printed out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file
    800      names is given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
    801      is the location of the definition.  The remaining files contain
    802      references to the symbol.
    803 
    804 `--no-define-common'
    805      This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
    806      The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
    807      *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    808 
    809      The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
    810      assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
    811      file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
    812      assigning addresses to Common symbols.  Using `--no-define-common'
    813      allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
    814      be assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates
    815      the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
    816      prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
    817      duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
    818      search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
    819 
    820 `--defsym SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
    821      Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
    822      address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many
    823      times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
    824      A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
    825      this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
    826      an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
    827      hexadecimal constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate
    828      expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
    829      script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
    830      _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
    831      sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
    832 
    833 `--demangle[=STYLE]'
    834 `--no-demangle'
    835      These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
    836      messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle,
    837      it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
    838      leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
    839      and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
    840      Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
    841      demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
    842      demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
    843      default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
    844      set.  These options may be used to override the default.
    845 
    846 `--dynamic-linker FILE'
    847      Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
    848      generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
    849      linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
    850      you are doing.
    851 
    852 `--fatal-warnings'
    853      Treat all warnings as errors.
    854 
    855 `--force-exe-suffix'
    856      Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
    857 
    858      If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
    859      `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
    860      output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
    861      option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
    862      Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
    863      an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
    864 
    865 `--no-gc-sections'
    866 `--gc-sections'
    867      Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
    868      on targets that do not support this option.  This option is not
    869      compatible with `-r'. The default behaviour (of not performing
    870      this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
    871      `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
    872 
    873 `--help'
    874      Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
    875      and exit.
    876 
    877 `--target-help'
    878      Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
    879      output and exit.
    880 
    881 `-Map MAPFILE'
    882      Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
    883      `-M' option, above.
    884 
    885 `--no-keep-memory'
    886      `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
    887      symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells `ld' to
    888      instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
    889      as necessary.  This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
    890      space while linking a large executable.
    891 
    892 `--no-undefined'
    893 `-z defs'
    894      Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
    895      This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
    896      library.  The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
    897      behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
    898      libraries being linked in.
    899 
    900 `--allow-multiple-definition'
    901 `-z muldefs'
    902      Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
    903      report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
    904      the first definition will be used.
    905 
    906 `--allow-shlib-undefined'
    907 `--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
    908      Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared
    909      libraries.  This switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that
    910      it determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
    911      shared library rather than a regular object file.  It does not
    912      affect how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
    913 
    914      The reason that `--allow-shlib-undefined' is the default is that
    915      the shared library being specified at link time may not be the
    916      same as the one that is available at load time, so the symbols
    917      might actually be resolvable at load time.  Plus there are some
    918      systems, (eg BeOS) where undefined symbols in shared libraries is
    919      normal.  (The kernel patches them at load time to select which
    920      function is most appropriate for the current architecture.  This
    921      is used for example to dynamically select an appropriate memset
    922      function).  Apparently it is also normal for HPPA shared libraries
    923      to have undefined symbols.
    924 
    925 `--no-undefined-version'
    926      Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
    927      ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
    928      and a fatal error will be issued instead.
    929 
    930 `--default-symver'
    931      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
    932      unversioned exported symbols.
    933 
    934 `--default-imported-symver'
    935      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
    936      unversioned imported symbols.
    937 
    938 `--no-warn-mismatch'
    939      Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
    940      files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
    941      have been compiled for different processors or for different
    942      endiannesses.  This option tells `ld' that it should silently
    943      permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
    944      care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
    945      ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
    946 
    947 `--no-whole-archive'
    948      Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
    949      archive files.
    950 
    951 `--noinhibit-exec'
    952      Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
    953      Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
    954      encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
    955      writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
    956 
    957 `-nostdlib'
    958      Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
    959      command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
    960      (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
    961      ignored.
    962 
    963 `--oformat OUTPUT-FORMAT'
    964      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
    965      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
    966      `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
    967      object file.  Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
    968      object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
    969      should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
    970      usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
    971      name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
    972      can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  The
    973      script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
    974      but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
    975 
    976 `-pie'
    977 `--pic-executable'
    978      Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
    979      supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
    980      similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
    981      dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
    982      (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
    983      linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
    984      executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
    985 
    986 `-qmagic'
    987      This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
    988 
    989 `-Qy'
    990      This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
    991 
    992 `--relax'
    993      An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
    994      supported on a few targets.  *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
    995      *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note `ld' and Xtensa
    996      Processors: Xtensa.  *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
    997      PowerPC ELF32.
    998 
    999      On some platforms, the `--relax' option performs global
   1000      optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
   1001      addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes and
   1002      synthesizing new instructions in the output object file.
   1003 
   1004      On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
   1005      symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This
   1006      is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
   1007      family of processors.
   1008 
   1009      On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
   1010      but ignored.
   1011 
   1012 `--retain-symbols-file FILENAME'
   1013      Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
   1014      all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
   1015      per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
   1016      as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
   1017      gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
   1018 
   1019      `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
   1020      symbols needed for relocations.
   1021 
   1022      You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
   1023      line.  It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
   1024 
   1025 `-rpath DIR'
   1026      Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
   1027      when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All `-rpath'
   1028      arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
   1029      uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The `-rpath'
   1030      option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
   1031      by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
   1032      description of the `-rpath-link' option.  If `-rpath' is not used
   1033      when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
   1034      variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
   1035 
   1036      The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
   1037      SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
   1038      `-L' options it is given.  If a `-rpath' option is used, the
   1039      runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
   1040      options, ignoring the `-L' options.  This can be useful when using
   1041      gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted
   1042      filesystems.
   1043 
   1044      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
   1045      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
   1046      treated as the `-rpath' option.
   1047 
   1048 `-rpath-link DIR'
   1049      When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
   1050      This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
   1051      as one of the input files.
   1052 
   1053      When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
   1054      non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
   1055      locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
   1056      it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
   1057      option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
   1058      `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
   1059      either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
   1060      appearing multiple times.
   1061 
   1062      This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
   1063      path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
   1064      such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
   1065      search path than the runtime linker would do.
   1066 
   1067      The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
   1068      shared libraries.
   1069        1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
   1070 
   1071        2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options.  The difference
   1072           between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
   1073           specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
   1074           and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
   1075           effective at link time. It is for the native linker only.
   1076 
   1077        3. On an ELF system, if the `-rpath' and `rpath-link' options
   1078           were not used, search the contents of the environment variable
   1079           `LD_RUN_PATH'. It is for the native linker only.
   1080 
   1081        4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
   1082           directories specified using `-L' options.
   1083 
   1084        5. For a native linker, the contents of the environment variable
   1085           `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
   1086 
   1087        6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
   1088           `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
   1089           libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
   1090           `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
   1091 
   1092        7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
   1093 
   1094        8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
   1095           `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
   1096           that file.
   1097 
   1098      If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
   1099      a warning and continue with the link.
   1100 
   1101 `-shared'
   1102 `-Bshareable'
   1103      Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
   1104      XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will
   1105      automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
   1106      used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
   1107 
   1108 `--sort-common'
   1109      This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by size when it
   1110      places them in the appropriate output sections.  First come all
   1111      the one byte symbols, then all the two byte, then all the four
   1112      byte, and then everything else.  This is to prevent gaps between
   1113      symbols due to alignment constraints.
   1114 
   1115 `--sort-section name'
   1116      This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
   1117      patterns in the linker script.
   1118 
   1119 `--sort-section alignment'
   1120      This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
   1121      patterns in the linker script.
   1122 
   1123 `--split-by-file [SIZE]'
   1124      Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
   1125      each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of
   1126      1 if not given.
   1127 
   1128 `--split-by-reloc [COUNT]'
   1129      Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
   1130      single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
   1131      relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable
   1132      files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
   1133      object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
   1134      relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
   1135      with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
   1136      The linker will not split up individual input sections for
   1137      redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
   1138      COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
   1139      relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
   1140 
   1141 `--stats'
   1142      Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
   1143      such as execution time and memory usage.
   1144 
   1145 `--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
   1146      Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
   1147      configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
   1148      that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
   1149 
   1150 `--traditional-format'
   1151      For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
   1152      the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests `ld' to
   1153      use the traditional format instead.
   1154 
   1155      For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
   1156      symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
   1157      with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
   1158      Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
   1159      program (`gdb' has no trouble).  The `--traditional-format' switch
   1160      tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
   1161 
   1162 `--section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG'
   1163      Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
   1164      by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
   1165      locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a
   1166      single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
   1167      you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
   1168      values.  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
   1169      SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
   1170 
   1171 `-Tbss ORG'
   1172 `-Tdata ORG'
   1173 `-Ttext ORG'
   1174      Same as -section-start, with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
   1175      SECTIONNAME.
   1176 
   1177 `--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
   1178      Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
   1179      possible values for `method':
   1180 
   1181     `ignore-all'
   1182           Do not report any unresolved symbols.
   1183 
   1184     `report-all'
   1185           Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
   1186 
   1187     `ignore-in-object-files'
   1188           Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
   1189           libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
   1190           files.
   1191 
   1192     `ignore-in-shared-libs'
   1193           Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
   1194           files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
   1195           This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
   1196           known that all the shared libraries that it should be
   1197           referencing are included on the linker's command line.
   1198 
   1199      The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
   1200      controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
   1201 
   1202      Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
   1203      reported unresolved symbol but the option
   1204      `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
   1205 
   1206 `--dll-verbose'
   1207 `--verbose'
   1208      Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
   1209      supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
   1210      Display the linker script being used by the linker.
   1211 
   1212 `--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
   1213      Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
   1214      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
   1215      additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
   1216      being created.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
   1217      which support shared libraries.  *Note VERSION::.
   1218 
   1219 `--warn-common'
   1220      Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
   1221      or with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat
   1222      sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
   1223      not.  This option allows you to find potential problems from
   1224      combining global symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use
   1225      this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
   1226      libraries as well as in your programs.
   1227 
   1228      There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
   1229      examples:
   1230 
   1231     `int i = 1;'
   1232           A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
   1233           the output file.
   1234 
   1235     `extern int i;'
   1236           An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
   1237           must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
   1238           variable somewhere.
   1239 
   1240     `int i;'
   1241           A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
   1242           symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
   1243           area of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common
   1244           symbols for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they
   1245           are of different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The
   1246           linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
   1247           a definition of the same variable.
   1248 
   1249      The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
   1250      Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
   1251      symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
   1252      symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
   1253      symbols will be a common symbol.
   1254 
   1255        1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
   1256           already a definition for the symbol.
   1257                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1258                   overridden by definition
   1259                FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
   1260 
   1261        2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
   1262           definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same
   1263           as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
   1264           in a different order.
   1265                FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
   1266                   overriding common
   1267                FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
   1268 
   1269        3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
   1270           symbol.
   1271                FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
   1272                   of `SYMBOL'
   1273                FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
   1274 
   1275        4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
   1276                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1277                   overridden by larger common
   1278                FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
   1279 
   1280        5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
   1281           symbol.  This is the same as the previous case, except that
   1282           the symbols are encountered in a different order.
   1283                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1284                   overriding smaller common
   1285                FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
   1286 
   1287 `--warn-constructors'
   1288      Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
   1289      a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
   1290      linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
   1291 
   1292 `--warn-multiple-gp'
   1293      Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
   1294      file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
   1295      Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
   1296      in a special section.  A special register (the global pointer)
   1297      points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
   1298      loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
   1299      Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
   1300      relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
   1301      the constant pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
   1302      to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
   1303      address all possible constants.  This option causes a warning to
   1304      be issued whenever this case occurs.
   1305 
   1306 `--warn-once'
   1307      Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
   1308      module which refers to it.
   1309 
   1310 `--warn-section-align'
   1311      Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
   1312      alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
   1313      section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
   1314      specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
   1315      start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
   1316 
   1317 `--warn-shared-textrel'
   1318      Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
   1319 
   1320 `--warn-unresolved-symbols'
   1321      If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
   1322      option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
   1323      This option makes it generate a warning instead.
   1324 
   1325 `--error-unresolved-symbols'
   1326      This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
   1327      when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
   1328 
   1329 `--whole-archive'
   1330      For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
   1331      `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
   1332      in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
   1333      object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into
   1334      a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
   1335      resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
   1336 
   1337      Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
   1338      about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
   1339      Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
   1340      list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
   1341      your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
   1342 
   1343 `--wrap SYMBOL'
   1344      Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
   1345      SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
   1346      reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
   1347 
   1348      This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
   1349      wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes
   1350      to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
   1351 
   1352      Here is a trivial example:
   1353 
   1354           void *
   1355           __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
   1356           {
   1357             printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
   1358             return __real_malloc (c);
   1359           }
   1360 
   1361      If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
   1362      all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
   1363      instead.  The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
   1364      the real `malloc' function.
   1365 
   1366      You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
   1367      links without the `--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
   1368      you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
   1369      file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
   1370      call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
   1371 
   1372 `--eh-frame-hdr'
   1373      Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
   1374      `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
   1375 
   1376 `--enable-new-dtags'
   1377 `--disable-new-dtags'
   1378      This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
   1379      ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
   1380      `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
   1381      If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
   1382      created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
   1383      that those options are only available for ELF systems.
   1384 
   1385 `--hash-size=NUMBER'
   1386      Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
   1387      close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
   1388      time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
   1389      increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
   1390      this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
   1391      speed.
   1392 
   1393 `--reduce-memory-overheads'
   1394      This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
   1395      expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
   1396      O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
   1397      O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
   1398 
   1399      Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
   1400      to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
   1401      linker's run time.  This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
   1402      switch has been used.
   1403 
   1404      The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
   1405      enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
   1406 
   1407 
   1408 2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
   1409 -----------------------------------------
   1410 
   1411 The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
   1412 output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
   1413 executable.  You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
   1414 option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
   1415 files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
   1416 file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
   1417 ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
   1418 
   1419    In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
   1420 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
   1421 PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values
   1422 by either a space or an equals sign.
   1423 
   1424 `--add-stdcall-alias'
   1425      If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
   1426      as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
   1427      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1428 
   1429 `--base-file FILE'
   1430      Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
   1431      of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
   1432      [This is an i386 PE specific option]
   1433 
   1434 `--dll'
   1435      Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
   1436      `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file.  [This
   1437      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1438 
   1439 `--enable-stdcall-fixup'
   1440 `--disable-stdcall-fixup'
   1441      If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
   1442      to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
   1443      differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
   1444      and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For
   1445      example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
   1446      function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
   1447      linked to the function `_bar'.  When the linker does this, it
   1448      prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
   1449      but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
   1450      need this feature to be usable.  If you specify
   1451      `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
   1452      warnings are not printed.  If you specify
   1453      `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
   1454      mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
   1455      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1456 
   1457 `--export-all-symbols'
   1458      If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
   1459      will be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if
   1460      there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
   1461      explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
   1462      function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
   1463      unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
   1464      `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
   1465      not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
   1466      DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
   1467      DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
   1468      ending with `_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
   1469      `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols
   1470      whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
   1471      exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive
   1472      list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
   1473      this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
   1474      cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1475      `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1476      `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
   1477      `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
   1478      `environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1479      of the linker]
   1480 
   1481 `--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
   1482      Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
   1483      exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
   1484      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1485      linker]
   1486 
   1487 `--file-alignment'
   1488      Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always
   1489      begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This
   1490      defaults to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
   1491      port of the linker]
   1492 
   1493 `--heap RESERVE'
   1494 `--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1495      Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to
   1496      be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
   1497      committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1498      of the linker]
   1499 
   1500 `--image-base VALUE'
   1501      Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
   1502      lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
   1503      is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
   1504      of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
   1505      overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
   1506      and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1507      targeted port of the linker]
   1508 
   1509 `--kill-at'
   1510      If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
   1511      before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1512      targeted port of the linker]
   1513 
   1514 `--large-address-aware'
   1515      If given, the appropriate bit in the "Charateristics" field of the
   1516      COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
   1517      virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used
   1518      in conjuction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
   1519      the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise,
   1520      this bit has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted
   1521      ports of the linker]
   1522 
   1523 `--major-image-version VALUE'
   1524      Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
   1525      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1526      linker]
   1527 
   1528 `--major-os-version VALUE'
   1529      Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
   1530      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1531 
   1532 `--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1533      Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
   1534      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1535      linker]
   1536 
   1537 `--minor-image-version VALUE'
   1538      Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
   1539      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1540      linker]
   1541 
   1542 `--minor-os-version VALUE'
   1543      Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
   1544      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1545 
   1546 `--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1547      Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
   1548      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1549      linker]
   1550 
   1551 `--output-def FILE'
   1552      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
   1553      corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
   1554      (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
   1555      library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
   1556      automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
   1557      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1558 
   1559 `--out-implib FILE'
   1560      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
   1561      lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
   1562      lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
   1563      clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
   1564      possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
   1565      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1566      linker]
   1567 
   1568 `--enable-auto-image-base'
   1569      Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
   1570      specified using the `--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
   1571      generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
   1572      DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
   1573      execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1574      targeted port of the linker]
   1575 
   1576 `--disable-auto-image-base'
   1577      Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
   1578      user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
   1579      default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1580      the linker]
   1581 
   1582 `--dll-search-prefix STRING'
   1583      When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
   1584      search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to
   1585      `lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
   1586      between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
   1587      uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
   1588      `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.  [This option is specific to the i386
   1589      PE targeted port of the linker]
   1590 
   1591 `--enable-auto-import'
   1592      Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
   1593      imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
   1594      building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
   1595      of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
   1596      image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
   1597      PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
   1598 
   1599      Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
   1600      may see this message:
   1601 
   1602      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   1603      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   1604 
   1605      This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
   1606      ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
   1607      only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
   1608      to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
   1609      as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
   1610      DLL.  Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
   1611      trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
   1612      data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
   1613      detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
   1614 
   1615      There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
   1616      the data type of the exported variable:
   1617 
   1618      One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
   1619      the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
   1620      environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
   1621      supports this feature.
   1622 
   1623      A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
   1624      variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
   1625      For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
   1626      array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
   1627      variable.  Thus:
   1628 
   1629           extern type extern_array[];
   1630           extern_array[1] -->
   1631              { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
   1632 
   1633      or
   1634 
   1635           extern type extern_array[];
   1636           extern_array[1] -->
   1637              { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
   1638 
   1639      For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
   1640      is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
   1641      variable:
   1642 
   1643           extern struct s extern_struct;
   1644           extern_struct.field -->
   1645              { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
   1646 
   1647      or
   1648 
   1649           extern long long extern_ll;
   1650           extern_ll -->
   1651             { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
   1652 
   1653      A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
   1654      'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
   1655      `__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
   1656      compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
   1657      building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
   1658      building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
   1659      between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
   1660      constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
   1661      usage:
   1662 
   1663      Original:
   1664           --foo.h
   1665           extern int arr[];
   1666           --foo.c
   1667           #include "foo.h"
   1668           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1669             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1670           }
   1671 
   1672      Solution 1:
   1673           --foo.h
   1674           extern int arr[];
   1675           --foo.c
   1676           #include "foo.h"
   1677           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1678             /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
   1679             volatile int *parr = arr;
   1680             printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
   1681           }
   1682 
   1683      Solution 2:
   1684           --foo.h
   1685           /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
   1686           #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
   1687             !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
   1688           #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
   1689           #else
   1690           #define FOO_IMPORT
   1691           #endif
   1692           extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
   1693           --foo.c
   1694           #include "foo.h"
   1695           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1696             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1697           }
   1698 
   1699      A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
   1700      use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
   1701      offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
   1702      functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1703      of the linker]
   1704 
   1705 `--disable-auto-import'
   1706      Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
   1707      `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
   1708      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1709 
   1710 `--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1711      If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
   1712      section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
   1713      switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
   1714      can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
   1715      data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1716      targeted port of the linker]
   1717 
   1718 `--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1719      Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
   1720      from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
   1721      i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1722 
   1723 `--enable-extra-pe-debug'
   1724      Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
   1725      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1726      linker]
   1727 
   1728 `--section-alignment'
   1729      Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
   1730      at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
   1731      0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1732      the linker]
   1733 
   1734 `--stack RESERVE'
   1735 `--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1736      Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to
   1737      be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
   1738      committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1739      of the linker]
   1740 
   1741 `--subsystem WHICH'
   1742 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
   1743 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
   1744      Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
   1745      legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
   1746      `posix', and `xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version
   1747      also.  Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option
   1748      is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1749 
   1750 
   1751 
   1752 File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation
   1753 
   1754 2.2 Environment Variables
   1755 =========================
   1756 
   1757 You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
   1758 `GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
   1759 
   1760    `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
   1761 `-b' (or its synonym `--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
   1762 names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
   1763 the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
   1764 `GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
   1765 format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
   1766 there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
   1767 that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
   1768 However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
   1769 conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
   1770 ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
   1771 
   1772    `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
   1773 `-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
   1774 behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
   1775 available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.  If the `-m'
   1776 option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
   1777 defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
   1778 configured.
   1779 
   1780    Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
   1781 `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
   1782 to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a
   1783 similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may
   1784 be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
   1785 
   1786 
   1787 File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
   1788 
   1789 3 Linker Scripts
   1790 ****************
   1791 
   1792 Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
   1793 in the linker command language.
   1794 
   1795    The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
   1796 sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
   1797 to control the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts
   1798 do nothing more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script
   1799 can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
   1800 commands described below.
   1801 
   1802    The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
   1803 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
   1804 linker executable.  You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
   1805 display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
   1806 as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
   1807 
   1808    You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
   1809 option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
   1810 linker script.
   1811 
   1812    You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
   1813 files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
   1814 Implicit Linker Scripts::.
   1815 
   1816 * Menu:
   1817 
   1818 * Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
   1819 * Script Format::		Linker Script Format
   1820 * Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
   1821 * Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
   1822 * Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
   1823 * SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
   1824 * MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
   1825 * PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
   1826 * VERSION::			VERSION Command
   1827 * Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
   1828 * Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
   1829 
   1830 
   1831 File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   1832 
   1833 3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
   1834 ================================
   1835 
   1836 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
   1837 describe the linker script language.
   1838 
   1839    The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
   1840 output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
   1841 "object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The
   1842 output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
   1843 will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other
   1844 things, a list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an
   1845 input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
   1846 file is an "output section".
   1847 
   1848    Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
   1849 also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
   1850 A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
   1851 should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
   1852 with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
   1853 memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
   1854 there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
   1855 is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
   1856 debugging information.
   1857 
   1858    Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
   1859 first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
   1860 section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
   1861 "LMA", or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
   1862 section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
   1863 same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
   1864 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
   1865 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
   1866 based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
   1867 RAM address would be the VMA.
   1868 
   1869    You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
   1870 program with the `-h' option.
   1871 
   1872    Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
   1873 table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
   1874 and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If
   1875 you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
   1876 defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
   1877 variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
   1878 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
   1879 
   1880    You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
   1881 or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
   1882 
   1883 
   1884 File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts
   1885 
   1886 3.2 Linker Script Format
   1887 ========================
   1888 
   1889 Linker scripts are text files.
   1890 
   1891    You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
   1892 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
   1893 symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
   1894 generally ignored.
   1895 
   1896    Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
   1897 directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
   1898 would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
   1899 in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
   1900 file name.
   1901 
   1902    You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
   1903 `/*' and `*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
   1904 whitespace.
   1905 
   1906 
   1907 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   1908 
   1909 3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
   1910 ================================
   1911 
   1912 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
   1913 
   1914    The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
   1915 `SECTIONS'.  You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
   1916 layout of the output file.
   1917 
   1918    The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
   1919 a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
   1920 initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
   1921 `.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume
   1922 further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
   1923 files.
   1924 
   1925    For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
   1926 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
   1927 linker script which will do that:
   1928      SECTIONS
   1929      {
   1930        . = 0x10000;
   1931        .text : { *(.text) }
   1932        . = 0x8000000;
   1933        .data : { *(.data) }
   1934        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   1935      }
   1936 
   1937    You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
   1938 by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
   1939 enclosed in curly braces.
   1940 
   1941    The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
   1942 sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
   1943 counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
   1944 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
   1945 current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
   1946 incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
   1947 `SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
   1948 
   1949    The second line defines an output section, `.text'.  The colon is
   1950 required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
   1951 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
   1952 which should be placed into this output section.  The `*' is a wildcard
   1953 which matches any file name.  The expression `*(.text)' means all
   1954 `.text' input sections in all input files.
   1955 
   1956    Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
   1957 `.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
   1958 section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
   1959 
   1960    The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
   1961 output file.  The linker will place the `.data' output section at
   1962 address `0x8000000'.  After the linker places the `.data' output
   1963 section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
   1964 size of the `.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
   1965 place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
   1966 section in memory.
   1967 
   1968    The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
   1969 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
   1970 example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
   1971 will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
   1972 have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
   1973 
   1974    That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
   1975 
   1976 
   1977 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts
   1978 
   1979 3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
   1980 =================================
   1981 
   1982 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
   1983 
   1984 * Menu:
   1985 
   1986 * Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
   1987 * File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
   1988 
   1989 * Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
   1990 
   1991 * Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
   1992 
   1993 
   1994 File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   1995 
   1996 3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
   1997 -----------------------------
   1998 
   1999 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
   2000 point".  You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
   2001 point.  The argument is a symbol name:
   2002      ENTRY(SYMBOL)
   2003 
   2004    There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
   2005 the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
   2006 stopping when one of them succeeds:
   2007    * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
   2008 
   2009    * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
   2010 
   2011    * the value of the symbol `start', if defined;
   2012 
   2013    * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
   2014 
   2015    * The address `0'.
   2016 
   2017 
   2018 File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands
   2019 
   2020 3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
   2021 ---------------------------------
   2022 
   2023 Several linker script commands deal with files.
   2024 
   2025 `INCLUDE FILENAME'
   2026      Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will
   2027      be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
   2028      specified with the `-L' option.  You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
   2029      up to 10 levels deep.
   2030 
   2031 `INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2032 `INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
   2033      The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
   2034      in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
   2035 
   2036      For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
   2037      a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
   2038      line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
   2039 
   2040      In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
   2041      linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
   2042      option.
   2043 
   2044      In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
   2045      with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
   2046      inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
   2047      the "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
   2048      file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker
   2049      will search through the archive library search path.  See the
   2050      description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2051 
   2052      If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
   2053      `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
   2054 
   2055      When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
   2056      files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
   2057      script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
   2058 
   2059 `GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2060 `GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
   2061      The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
   2062      should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
   2063      new undefined references are created.  See the description of `-('
   2064      in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2065 
   2066 `AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2067 `AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
   2068      This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
   2069      commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
   2070      as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
   2071      with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
   2072      when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
   2073      `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
   2074      restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
   2075      afterwards.
   2076 
   2077 `OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
   2078      The `OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
   2079      `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
   2080      FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
   2081      Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
   2082      precedence.
   2083 
   2084      You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
   2085      output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
   2086 
   2087 `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
   2088      The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
   2089      looks for archive libraries.  Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
   2090      like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
   2091      Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
   2092      both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
   2093      searched first.
   2094 
   2095 `STARTUP(FILENAME)'
   2096      The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
   2097      that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
   2098      though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be
   2099      useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
   2100      start of the first file.
   2101 
   2102 
   2103 File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2104 
   2105 3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
   2106 -----------------------------------------------
   2107 
   2108 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
   2109 
   2110 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
   2111 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
   2112      The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
   2113      output file (*note BFD::).  Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
   2114      exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2115      Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
   2116      line option takes precedence.
   2117 
   2118      You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
   2119      formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options.  This
   2120      permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
   2121      desired endianness.
   2122 
   2123      If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
   2124      be the first argument, DEFAULT.  If `-EB' is used, the output
   2125      format will be the second argument, BIG.  If `-EL' is used, the
   2126      output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
   2127 
   2128      For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
   2129      uses this command:
   2130           OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
   2131      This says that the default format for the output file is
   2132      `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
   2133      option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
   2134      format.
   2135 
   2136 `TARGET(BFDNAME)'
   2137      The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
   2138      files.  It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands.  This
   2139      command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2140      Command Line Options: Options.).  If the `TARGET' command is used
   2141      but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
   2142      used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
   2143 
   2144 
   2145 File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2146 
   2147 3.4.4 Other Linker Script Commands
   2148 ----------------------------------
   2149 
   2150 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
   2151 
   2152 `ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
   2153      Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
   2154      with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
   2155 
   2156 `EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
   2157      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
   2158      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
   2159      modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
   2160      each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times.  This
   2161      command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
   2162 
   2163 `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2164      This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
   2165      to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
   2166      output file is specified (`-r').
   2167 
   2168 `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2169      This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
   2170      command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
   2171      to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
   2172 
   2173 `NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
   2174      This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
   2175      references among certain output sections.
   2176 
   2177      In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
   2178      using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
   2179      section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
   2180      sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
   2181      code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
   2182 
   2183      The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
   2184      `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
   2185      an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
   2186      `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
   2187      names.
   2188 
   2189 `OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
   2190      Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
   2191      one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
   2192      see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
   2193      program with the `-f' option.
   2194 
   2195 
   2196 File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts
   2197 
   2198 3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
   2199 ===============================
   2200 
   2201 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
   2202 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
   2203 
   2204 * Menu:
   2205 
   2206 * Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
   2207 * PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
   2208 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2209 * Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
   2210 
   2211 
   2212 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2213 
   2214 3.5.1 Simple Assignments
   2215 ------------------------
   2216 
   2217 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
   2218 
   2219 `SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
   2220 `SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
   2221 `SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
   2222 `SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
   2223 `SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
   2224 `SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
   2225 `SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
   2226 `SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
   2227 `SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
   2228 
   2229    The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In
   2230 the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
   2231 adjusted accordingly.
   2232 
   2233    The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter.  You may
   2234 only use this within a `SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
   2235 
   2236    The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
   2237 
   2238    Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
   2239 
   2240    You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
   2241 as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
   2242 section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
   2243 
   2244    The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
   2245 expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
   2246 
   2247    Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
   2248 assignments may be used:
   2249 
   2250      floating_point = 0;
   2251      SECTIONS
   2252      {
   2253        .text :
   2254          {
   2255            *(.text)
   2256            _etext = .;
   2257          }
   2258        _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
   2259        .data : { *(.data) }
   2260      }
   2261    In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
   2262 zero.  The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
   2263 last `.text' input section.  The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
   2264 address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
   2265 boundary.
   2266 
   2267 
   2268 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments
   2269 
   2270 3.5.2 PROVIDE
   2271 -------------
   2272 
   2273 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
   2274 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
   2275 the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
   2276 However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
   2277 function name without encountering an error.  The `PROVIDE' keyword may
   2278 be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
   2279 but not defined.  The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
   2280 
   2281    Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
   2282      SECTIONS
   2283      {
   2284        .text :
   2285          {
   2286            *(.text)
   2287            _etext = .;
   2288            PROVIDE(etext = .);
   2289          }
   2290      }
   2291 
   2292    In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
   2293 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
   2294 the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
   2295 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
   2296 If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
   2297 will use the definition in the linker script.
   2298 
   2299 
   2300 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2301 
   2302 3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2303 --------------------
   2304 
   2305 Similar to `PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
   2306 hidden and won't be exported.
   2307 
   2308 
   2309 File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
   2310 
   2311 3.5.4 Source Code Reference
   2312 ---------------------------
   2313 
   2314 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
   2315 intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
   2316 variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
   2317 that does not have a value.
   2318 
   2319    Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
   2320 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
   2321 stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
   2322 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
   2323 mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
   2324 a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
   2325 variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
   2326 linker script variable might be referred to as:
   2327 
   2328        extern int foo;
   2329 
   2330    But in the linker script it might be defined as:
   2331 
   2332        _foo = 1000;
   2333 
   2334    In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
   2335 transformation has taken place.
   2336 
   2337    When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
   2338 things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
   2339 the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
   2340 that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
   2341 holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
   2342 of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
   2343 following C declaration, at file scope:
   2344 
   2345        int foo = 1000;
   2346 
   2347    creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
   2348 the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
   2349 initially stored.
   2350 
   2351    When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
   2352 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
   2353 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
   2354 So:
   2355 
   2356        foo = 1;
   2357 
   2358    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
   2359 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
   2360 address.  Whereas:
   2361 
   2362        int * a = & foo;
   2363 
   2364    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
   2365 then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
   2366 variable `a'.
   2367 
   2368    Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
   2369 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
   2370 an address without a value.  So for example the linker script
   2371 definition:
   2372 
   2373        foo = 1000;
   2374 
   2375    creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
   2376 address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
   2377 address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
   2378 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
   2379 access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
   2380 
   2381    Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
   2382 code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
   2383 attempt to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the
   2384 contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
   2385 .FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
   2386 
   2387        start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
   2388        end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
   2389        start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
   2390 
   2391    Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
   2392 
   2393        extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
   2394 
   2395        memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
   2396 
   2397    Note the use of the `&' operators.  These are correct.
   2398 
   2399 
   2400 File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts
   2401 
   2402 3.6 SECTIONS Command
   2403 ====================
   2404 
   2405 The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
   2406 output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
   2407 
   2408    The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
   2409      SECTIONS
   2410      {
   2411        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2412        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2413        ...
   2414      }
   2415 
   2416    Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
   2417 
   2418    * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
   2419 
   2420    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2421 
   2422    * an output section description
   2423 
   2424    * an overlay description
   2425 
   2426    The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
   2427 `SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
   2428 those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
   2429 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
   2430 the layout of the output file.
   2431 
   2432    Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
   2433 below.
   2434 
   2435    If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
   2436 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
   2437 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
   2438 input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
   2439 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
   2440 in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
   2441 
   2442 * Menu:
   2443 
   2444 * Output Section Description::	Output section description
   2445 * Output Section Name::		Output section name
   2446 * Output Section Address::	Output section address
   2447 * Input Section::		Input section description
   2448 * Output Section Data::		Output section data
   2449 * Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
   2450 * Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
   2451 * Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
   2452 * Overlay Description::		Overlay description
   2453 
   2454 
   2455 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2456 
   2457 3.6.1 Output Section Description
   2458 --------------------------------
   2459 
   2460 The full description of an output section looks like this:
   2461      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   2462        [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   2463        {
   2464          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2465          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2466          ...
   2467        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   2468 
   2469    Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
   2470 attributes.
   2471 
   2472    The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
   2473 is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
   2474 line breaks and other white space are optional.
   2475 
   2476    Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
   2477 
   2478    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2479 
   2480    * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
   2481 
   2482    * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
   2483 
   2484    * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
   2485 
   2486 
   2487 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS
   2488 
   2489 3.6.2 Output Section Name
   2490 -------------------------
   2491 
   2492 The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
   2493 constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
   2494 limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
   2495 the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
   2496 `.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
   2497 of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
   2498 the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
   2499 may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
   2500 any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
   2501 
   2502    The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
   2503 Discarding::.
   2504 
   2505 
   2506 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2507 
   2508 3.6.3 Output Section Address
   2509 ----------------------------
   2510 
   2511 The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
   2512 of the output section.  If you do not provide ADDRESS, the linker will
   2513 set it based on REGION if present, or otherwise based on the current
   2514 value of the location counter.
   2515 
   2516    If you provide ADDRESS, the address of the output section will be
   2517 set to precisely that.  If you provide neither ADDRESS nor REGION, then
   2518 the address of the output section will be set to the current value of
   2519 the location counter aligned to the alignment requirements of the
   2520 output section.  The alignment requirement of the output section is the
   2521 strictest alignment of any input section contained within the output
   2522 section.
   2523 
   2524    For example,
   2525      .text . : { *(.text) }
   2526    and
   2527      .text : { *(.text) }
   2528    are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the `.text'
   2529 output section to the current value of the location counter.  The
   2530 second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
   2531 to the strictest alignment of a `.text' input section.
   2532 
   2533    The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
   2534 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
   2535 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
   2536 do something like this:
   2537      .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
   2538    This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
   2539 aligned upward to the specified value.
   2540 
   2541    Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
   2542 location counter.
   2543 
   2544 
   2545 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS
   2546 
   2547 3.6.4 Input Section Description
   2548 -------------------------------
   2549 
   2550 The most common output section command is an input section description.
   2551 
   2552    The input section description is the most basic linker script
   2553 operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
   2554 your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
   2555 linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
   2556 
   2557 * Menu:
   2558 
   2559 * Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
   2560 * Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
   2561 * Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
   2562 * Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
   2563 * Input Section Example::	Input section example
   2564 
   2565 
   2566 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   2567 
   2568 3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
   2569 ............................
   2570 
   2571 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
   2572 by a list of section names in parentheses.
   2573 
   2574    The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
   2575 describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
   2576 
   2577    The most common input section description is to include all input
   2578 sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
   2579 include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
   2580      *(.text)
   2581    Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude
   2582 a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
   2583 be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
   2584 EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For example:
   2585      (*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors))
   2586    will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
   2587 `otherfile.o' to be included.
   2588 
   2589    There are two ways to include more than one section:
   2590      *(.text .rdata)
   2591      *(.text) *(.rdata)
   2592    The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
   2593 `.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
   2594 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
   2595 they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all `.text'
   2596 input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
   2597 sections.
   2598 
   2599    You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
   2600 file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
   2601 data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
   2602      data.o(.data)
   2603 
   2604    If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
   2605 in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
   2606 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
   2607      data.o
   2608 
   2609    When you use a file name which does not contain any wild card
   2610 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
   2611 name on the linker command line or in an `INPUT' command.  If you did
   2612 not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
   2613 though it appeared on the command line.  Note that this differs from an
   2614 `INPUT' command, because the linker will not search for the file in the
   2615 archive search path.
   2616 
   2617 
   2618 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section
   2619 
   2620 3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
   2621 .......................................
   2622 
   2623 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
   2624 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
   2625 
   2626    The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
   2627 pattern for the file name.
   2628 
   2629    The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
   2630 
   2631 `*'
   2632      matches any number of characters
   2633 
   2634 `?'
   2635      matches any single character
   2636 
   2637 `[CHARS]'
   2638      matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
   2639      may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
   2640      match any lower case letter
   2641 
   2642 `\'
   2643      quotes the following character
   2644 
   2645    When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
   2646 will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
   2647 Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
   2648 it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
   2649 In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
   2650 
   2651    File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
   2652 specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command.  The linker
   2653 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
   2654 
   2655    If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
   2656 name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
   2657 linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
   2658 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
   2659 `data.o' rule will not be used:
   2660      .data : { *(.data) }
   2661      .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
   2662 
   2663    Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
   2664 wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
   2665 change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
   2666 wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
   2667 the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
   2668 sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
   2669 file.
   2670 
   2671    `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
   2672 difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
   2673 order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
   2674 
   2675    `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
   2676 
   2677    When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
   2678 there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
   2679 
   2680   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2681      It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
   2682      if 2 sections have the same name.
   2683 
   2684   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2685      It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
   2686      if 2 sections have the same alignment.
   2687 
   2688   3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
   2689      treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
   2690 
   2691   4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
   2692      pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
   2693      section pattern).
   2694 
   2695   5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
   2696 
   2697    When both command line section sorting option and linker script
   2698 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
   2699 precedence over the command line option.
   2700 
   2701    If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
   2702 command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
   2703 as nested sorting command.
   2704 
   2705   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
   2706      alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   2707      (wildcard section pattern)).
   2708 
   2709   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
   2710      `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   2711      (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2712 
   2713    If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
   2714 command line option will be ignored.
   2715 
   2716    If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
   2717 the `-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
   2718 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
   2719 
   2720    This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
   2721 files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
   2722 sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'.  The linker will
   2723 place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
   2724 character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
   2725 `.data' section in `.data'.
   2726      SECTIONS {
   2727        .text : { *(.text) }
   2728        .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
   2729        .data : { *(.data) }
   2730        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   2731      }
   2732 
   2733 
   2734 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   2735 
   2736 3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
   2737 ........................................
   2738 
   2739 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
   2740 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
   2741 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
   2742 named `COMMON'.
   2743 
   2744    You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
   2745 other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
   2746 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
   2747 input files are placed in another section.
   2748 
   2749    In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
   2750 `.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
   2751      .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
   2752 
   2753    Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
   2754 For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
   2755 common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
   2756 use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
   2757 In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
   2758 symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
   2759 map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
   2760 locations.
   2761 
   2762    You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
   2763 notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
   2764 
   2765 
   2766 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section
   2767 
   2768 3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
   2769 ............................................
   2770 
   2771 When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
   2772 often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
   2773 accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
   2774 `KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
   2775 
   2776 
   2777 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section
   2778 
   2779 3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
   2780 .............................
   2781 
   2782 The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
   2783 to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
   2784 start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
   2785 All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
   2786 same output section.  All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
   2787 output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
   2788 All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
   2789 are written to output section `outputc'.
   2790 
   2791      SECTIONS {
   2792        outputa 0x10000 :
   2793          {
   2794          all.o
   2795          foo.o (.input1)
   2796          }
   2797        outputb :
   2798          {
   2799          foo.o (.input2)
   2800          foo1.o (.input1)
   2801          }
   2802        outputc :
   2803          {
   2804          *(.input1)
   2805          *(.input2)
   2806          }
   2807      }
   2808 
   2809 
   2810 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS
   2811 
   2812 3.6.5 Output Section Data
   2813 -------------------------
   2814 
   2815 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
   2816 `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
   2817 command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
   2818 providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
   2819 expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
   2820 
   2821    The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
   2822 four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
   2823 location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
   2824 
   2825    For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
   2826 value of the symbol `addr':
   2827      BYTE(1)
   2828      LONG(addr)
   2829 
   2830    When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
   2831 they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
   2832 are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case `QUAD'
   2833 stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
   2834 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
   2835 
   2836    If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
   2837 endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
   2838 endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
   2839 endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
   2840 stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
   2841 
   2842    Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
   2843 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
   2844      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
   2845    whereas this will work:
   2846      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
   2847 
   2848    You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
   2849 current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
   2850 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
   2851 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
   2852 with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A `FILL'
   2853 statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
   2854 the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
   2855 you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
   2856 section.
   2857 
   2858    This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
   2859 value `0x90':
   2860      FILL(0x90909090)
   2861 
   2862    The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
   2863 attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
   2864 `FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
   2865 `FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
   2866 details on the fill expression.
   2867 
   2868 
   2869 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS
   2870 
   2871 3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
   2872 -----------------------------
   2873 
   2874 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
   2875 commands.
   2876 
   2877 `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
   2878      The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
   2879      file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
   2880      corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
   2881      output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
   2882      appears.
   2883 
   2884      This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
   2885      normally used for any other object file format.
   2886 
   2887 `CONSTRUCTORS'
   2888      When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
   2889      unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
   2890      destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
   2891      arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
   2892      automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
   2893      name.  For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
   2894      tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
   2895      section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
   2896      `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
   2897 
   2898      The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
   2899      constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
   2900      Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
   2901      end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
   2902      number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
   2903      destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
   2904      actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
   2905      normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
   2906      `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
   2907      `main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
   2908      `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
   2909 
   2910      For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
   2911      arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
   2912      addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
   2913      and `.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
   2914      linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
   2915      runtime code expects to see.
   2916 
   2917                 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
   2918                 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   2919                 *(.ctors)
   2920                 LONG(0)
   2921                 __CTOR_END__ = .;
   2922                 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
   2923                 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   2924                 *(.dtors)
   2925                 LONG(0)
   2926                 __DTOR_END__ = .;
   2927 
   2928      If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
   2929      which provides some control over the order in which global
   2930      constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
   2931      to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
   2932      the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
   2933      instead.  When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
   2934      `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
   2935      just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
   2936 
   2937      Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
   2938      automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
   2939      them.  However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
   2940      and writing your own linker scripts.
   2941 
   2942 
   2943 
   2944 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS
   2945 
   2946 3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
   2947 -------------------------------
   2948 
   2949 The linker will not create output section which do not have any
   2950 contents.  This is for convenience when referring to input sections that
   2951 may or may not be present in any of the input files.  For example:
   2952      .foo { *(.foo) }
   2953    will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
   2954 `.foo' section in at least one input file.
   2955 
   2956    If you use anything other than an input section description as an
   2957 output section command, such as a symbol assignment, then the output
   2958 section will always be created, even if there are no matching input
   2959 sections.
   2960 
   2961    The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
   2962 input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
   2963 section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
   2964 
   2965 
   2966 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS
   2967 
   2968 3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
   2969 -------------------------------
   2970 
   2971 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
   2972 like this:
   2973      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   2974        [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   2975        {
   2976          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2977          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2978          ...
   2979        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   2980 We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
   2981 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.  In this section we will describe the remaining
   2982 section attributes.
   2983 
   2984 * Menu:
   2985 
   2986 * Output Section Type::		Output section type
   2987 * Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
   2988 * Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
   2989 * Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
   2990 * Output Section Region::	Output section region
   2991 * Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
   2992 * Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
   2993 
   2994 
   2995 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   2996 
   2997 3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
   2998 ...........................
   2999 
   3000 Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
   3001 parentheses.  The following types are defined:
   3002 
   3003 `NOLOAD'
   3004      The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
   3005      be loaded into memory when the program is run.
   3006 
   3007 `DSECT'
   3008 `COPY'
   3009 `INFO'
   3010 `OVERLAY'
   3011      These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
   3012      rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
   3013      marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
   3014      section when the program is run.
   3015 
   3016    The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
   3017 the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
   3018 the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
   3019 section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
   3020 loaded when the program is run.  The contents of the `ROM' section will
   3021 appear in the linker output file as usual.
   3022      SECTIONS {
   3023        ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
   3024        ...
   3025      }
   3026 
   3027 
   3028 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3029 
   3030 3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
   3031 ..........................
   3032 
   3033 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
   3034 *Note Basic Script Concepts::.  The address expression which may appear
   3035 in an output section description sets the VMA (*note Output Section
   3036 Address::).
   3037 
   3038    The linker will normally set the LMA equal to the VMA.  You can
   3039 change that by using the `AT' keyword.  The expression LMA that follows
   3040 the `AT' keyword specifies the load address of the section.
   3041 
   3042    Alternatively, with `AT>LMA_REGION' expression, you may specify a
   3043 memory region for the section's load address. *Note MEMORY::.  Note
   3044 that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the linker
   3045 will use the LMA_REGION as the VMA region as well.  *Note Output
   3046 Section Region::.
   3047 
   3048    This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
   3049 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
   3050 called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
   3051 loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
   3052 `0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
   3053 `0x3000'.  The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
   3054 shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
   3055 
   3056      SECTIONS
   3057        {
   3058        .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
   3059        .mdata 0x2000 :
   3060          AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
   3061          { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
   3062        .bss 0x3000 :
   3063          { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
   3064      }
   3065 
   3066    The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
   3067 with this linker script would include something like the following, to
   3068 copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
   3069 Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
   3070 linker script.
   3071 
   3072      extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
   3073      char *src = &_etext;
   3074      char *dst = &_data;
   3075 
   3076      /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
   3077      while (dst < &_edata) {
   3078        *dst++ = *src++;
   3079      }
   3080 
   3081      /* Zero bss */
   3082      for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
   3083        *dst = 0;
   3084 
   3085 
   3086 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3087 
   3088 3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
   3089 ...............................
   3090 
   3091 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
   3092 
   3093 
   3094 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3095 
   3096 3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
   3097 ..............................
   3098 
   3099 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
   3100 SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
   3101 sections, whether larger or smaller.
   3102 
   3103 
   3104 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3105 
   3106 3.6.8.5 Output Section Region
   3107 .............................
   3108 
   3109 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
   3110 using `>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
   3111 
   3112    Here is a simple example:
   3113      MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
   3114      SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
   3115 
   3116 
   3117 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3118 
   3119 3.6.8.6 Output Section Phdr
   3120 ...........................
   3121 
   3122 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
   3123 using `:PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
   3124 segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
   3125 those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
   3126 You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
   3127 segment at all.
   3128 
   3129    Here is a simple example:
   3130      PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
   3131      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
   3132 
   3133 
   3134 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3135 
   3136 3.6.8.7 Output Section Fill
   3137 ...........................
   3138 
   3139 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
   3140 FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
   3141 unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
   3142 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
   3143 filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression
   3144 is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
   3145 and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
   3146 hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern;  Leading zeros
   3147 become part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
   3148 parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
   3149 significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
   3150 number is big-endian.
   3151 
   3152    You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
   3153 output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
   3154 
   3155    Here is a simple example:
   3156      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
   3157 
   3158 
   3159 File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS
   3160 
   3161 3.6.9 Overlay Description
   3162 -------------------------
   3163 
   3164 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
   3165 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
   3166 the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
   3167 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
   3168 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
   3169 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
   3170 than another.
   3171 
   3172    Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command.  The `OVERLAY'
   3173 command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
   3174 description.  The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
   3175      OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
   3176        {
   3177          SECNAME1
   3178            {
   3179              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3180              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3181              ...
   3182            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3183          SECNAME2
   3184            {
   3185              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3186              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3187              ...
   3188            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3189          ...
   3190        } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3191 
   3192    Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
   3193 section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section
   3194 definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
   3195 within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
   3196 no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
   3197 an `OVERLAY'.
   3198 
   3199    The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
   3200 load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
   3201 consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
   3202 `OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
   3203 address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
   3204 address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
   3205 location counter).
   3206 
   3207    If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
   3208 the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
   3209 run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
   3210 section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
   3211 Commands.
   3212 
   3213    For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
   3214 defines two symbols.  The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
   3215 the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
   3216 `__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
   3217 section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
   3218 identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
   3219 to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
   3220 
   3221    At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
   3222 to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
   3223 section.
   3224 
   3225    Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
   3226 `SECTIONS' construct.
   3227        OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
   3228         {
   3229           .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3230           .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3231         }
   3232 This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
   3233 0x1000.  `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
   3234 be loaded immediately after `.text0'.  The following symbols will be
   3235 defined: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
   3236 `__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
   3237 
   3238    C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
   3239 like the following.
   3240 
   3241        extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
   3242        memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
   3243                &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
   3244 
   3245    Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
   3246 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
   3247 example could have been written identically as follows.
   3248 
   3249        .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3250        __load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0);
   3251        __load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0);
   3252        .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3253        __load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1);
   3254        __load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1);
   3255        . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
   3256 
   3257 
   3258 File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts
   3259 
   3260 3.7 MEMORY Command
   3261 ==================
   3262 
   3263 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
   3264 memory.  You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
   3265 
   3266    The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
   3267 memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
   3268 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
   3269 can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
   3270 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
   3271 regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
   3272 around to fit into the available regions.
   3273 
   3274    A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
   3275 However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
   3276 wish.  The syntax is:
   3277      MEMORY
   3278        {
   3279          NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
   3280          ...
   3281        }
   3282 
   3283    The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
   3284 The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
   3285 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3286 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
   3287 have a distinct name.
   3288 
   3289    The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
   3290 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
   3291 not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *Note
   3292 SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
   3293 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
   3294 the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
   3295 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
   3296 
   3297    The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
   3298 `R'
   3299      Read-only section
   3300 
   3301 `W'
   3302      Read/write section
   3303 
   3304 `X'
   3305      Executable section
   3306 
   3307 `A'
   3308      Allocatable section
   3309 
   3310 `I'
   3311      Initialized section
   3312 
   3313 `L'
   3314      Same as `I'
   3315 
   3316 `!'
   3317      Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
   3318 
   3319    If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
   3320 `!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The `!' attribute
   3321 reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
   3322 memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
   3323 
   3324    The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
   3325 memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
   3326 cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
   3327 `org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
   3328 
   3329    The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
   3330 As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
   3331 and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword `LENGTH' may be
   3332 abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
   3333 
   3334    In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
   3335 regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
   3336 and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
   3337 will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
   3338 explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
   3339 executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
   3340 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
   3341 
   3342      MEMORY
   3343        {
   3344          rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
   3345          ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
   3346        }
   3347 
   3348    Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
   3349 specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
   3350 output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
   3351 named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
   3352 *Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
   3353 output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
   3354 address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
   3355 directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
   3356 will issue an error message.
   3357 
   3358    It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
   3359 expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
   3360 
   3361        _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
   3362 
   3363 
   3364 File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts
   3365 
   3366 3.8 PHDRS Command
   3367 =================
   3368 
   3369 The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
   3370 "segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
   3371 loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the `objdump'
   3372 program with the `-p' option.
   3373 
   3374    When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
   3375 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
   3376 program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
   3377 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
   3378 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
   3379 
   3380    The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
   3381 However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
   3382 precisely.  You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
   3383 linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
   3384 create any program headers other than the ones specified.
   3385 
   3386    The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
   3387 generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
   3388 ignore `PHDRS'.
   3389 
   3390    This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command.  The words `PHDRS',
   3391 `FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
   3392 
   3393      PHDRS
   3394      {
   3395        NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
   3396              [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
   3397      }
   3398 
   3399    The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
   3400 linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
   3401 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3402 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
   3403 have a distinct name.
   3404 
   3405    Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
   3406 system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
   3407 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
   3408 sections in the segments.  You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
   3409 to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
   3410 Phdr::.
   3411 
   3412    It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
   3413 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
   3414 repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
   3415 section.
   3416 
   3417    If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
   3418 the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
   3419 specify `:PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
   3420 generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
   3421 segment.  You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
   3422 the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
   3423 
   3424    You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords appear after the
   3425 program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
   3426 The `FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
   3427 file header.  The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include
   3428 the ELF program headers themselves.
   3429 
   3430    The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
   3431 value of the keyword.
   3432 
   3433 `PT_NULL' (0)
   3434      Indicates an unused program header.
   3435 
   3436 `PT_LOAD' (1)
   3437      Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
   3438      loaded from the file.
   3439 
   3440 `PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
   3441      Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
   3442 
   3443 `PT_INTERP' (3)
   3444      Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
   3445      be found.
   3446 
   3447 `PT_NOTE' (4)
   3448      Indicates a segment holding note information.
   3449 
   3450 `PT_SHLIB' (5)
   3451      A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
   3452      ELF ABI.
   3453 
   3454 `PT_PHDR' (6)
   3455      Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
   3456 
   3457 EXPRESSION
   3458      An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
   3459      may be used for types not defined above.
   3460 
   3461    You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
   3462 address in memory by using an `AT' expression.  This is identical to the
   3463 `AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
   3464 LMA::).  The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
   3465 section attribute.
   3466 
   3467    The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
   3468 which comprise the segment.  You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
   3469 explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
   3470 integer.  It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
   3471 
   3472    Here is an example of `PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
   3473 headers used on a native ELF system.
   3474 
   3475      PHDRS
   3476      {
   3477        headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
   3478        interp PT_INTERP ;
   3479        text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
   3480        data PT_LOAD ;
   3481        dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
   3482      }
   3483 
   3484      SECTIONS
   3485      {
   3486        . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
   3487        .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
   3488        .text : { *(.text) } :text
   3489        .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
   3490        ...
   3491        . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
   3492        .data : { *(.data) } :data
   3493        .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
   3494        ...
   3495      }
   3496 
   3497 
   3498 File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts
   3499 
   3500 3.9 VERSION Command
   3501 ===================
   3502 
   3503 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
   3504 only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
   3505 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
   3506 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
   3507 shared library.
   3508 
   3509    You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
   3510 or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
   3511 can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
   3512 
   3513    The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
   3514      VERSION { version-script-commands }
   3515 
   3516    The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
   3517 by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
   3518 version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
   3519 version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
   3520 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
   3521 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
   3522 library.
   3523 
   3524    The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
   3525 few examples.
   3526 
   3527      VERS_1.1 {
   3528      	 global:
   3529      		 foo1;
   3530      	 local:
   3531      		 old*;
   3532      		 original*;
   3533      		 new*;
   3534      };
   3535 
   3536      VERS_1.2 {
   3537      		 foo2;
   3538      } VERS_1.1;
   3539 
   3540      VERS_2.0 {
   3541      		 bar1; bar2;
   3542      	 extern "C++" {
   3543      		 ns::*;
   3544      		 "int f(int, double)";
   3545               }
   3546      } VERS_1.2;
   3547 
   3548    This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
   3549 version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
   3550 script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
   3551 symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
   3552 shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
   3553 symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
   3554 The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
   3555 when matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you
   3556 specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
   3557 as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
   3558 
   3559    Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
   3560 upon `VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
   3561 node `VERS_1.2'.
   3562 
   3563    Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'.  This node
   3564 depends upon `VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
   3565 `bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
   3566 
   3567    When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
   3568 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
   3569 unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
   3570 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
   3571 somewhere in the version script.
   3572 
   3573    The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
   3574 what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The `2.0' version
   3575 could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'.  However,
   3576 this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
   3577 
   3578    Node name can be omited, provided it is the only version node in the
   3579 version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
   3580 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
   3581 which won't.
   3582 
   3583      { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
   3584 
   3585    When you link an application against a shared library that has
   3586 versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
   3587 symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
   3588 each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
   3589 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
   3590 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
   3591 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
   3592 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
   3593 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
   3594 search for each symbol reference.
   3595 
   3596    The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
   3597 doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
   3598 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
   3599 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
   3600 the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
   3601 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
   3602 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
   3603 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
   3604 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
   3605 
   3606    There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
   3607 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
   3608 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
   3609 script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
   3610 maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
   3611      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   3612    in the C source file.  This renames the function `original_foo' to
   3613 be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'.  The
   3614 `local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
   3615 from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
   3616 version script.
   3617 
   3618    The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
   3619 function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
   3620 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
   3621 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
   3622 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
   3623 
   3624    To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
   3625 file.  Here is an example:
   3626 
   3627      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
   3628      __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   3629      __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo (a] VERS_1.2");
   3630      __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
   3631 
   3632    In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
   3633 unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
   3634 this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
   3635 `old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
   3636 
   3637    When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
   3638 be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
   3639 this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
   3640 type of `.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
   3641 symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
   3642 have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
   3643 
   3644    If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
   3645 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
   3646 (i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
   3647 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
   3648 
   3649    You can also specify the language in the version script:
   3650 
   3651      VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
   3652 
   3653    The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'.  The linker will
   3654 iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
   3655 according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
   3656 `version-script-commands'.
   3657 
   3658    Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
   3659 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
   3660 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
   3661 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
   3662 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
   3663 cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
   3664 change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
   3665 check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
   3666 when you upgrade.
   3667 
   3668 
   3669 File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts
   3670 
   3671 3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
   3672 ==================================
   3673 
   3674 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
   3675 that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
   3676 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
   3677 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
   3678 
   3679    You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
   3680 
   3681    The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
   3682 in expressions.
   3683 
   3684 * Menu:
   3685 
   3686 * Constants::			Constants
   3687 * Symbols::			Symbol Names
   3688 * Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
   3689 * Location Counter::		The Location Counter
   3690 * Operators::			Operators
   3691 * Evaluation::			Evaluation
   3692 * Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
   3693 * Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
   3694 
   3695 
   3696 File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   3697 
   3698 3.10.1 Constants
   3699 ----------------
   3700 
   3701 All constants are integers.
   3702 
   3703    As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
   3704 octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
   3705 The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
   3706 
   3707    In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
   3708 constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively. For example, the
   3709 following all refer to the same quantity:
   3710      _fourk_1 = 4K;
   3711      _fourk_2 = 4096;
   3712      _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
   3713 
   3714 
   3715 File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions
   3716 
   3717 3.10.2 Symbol Names
   3718 -------------------
   3719 
   3720 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
   3721 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
   3722 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
   3723 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
   3724 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
   3725      "SECTION" = 9;
   3726      "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
   3727 
   3728    Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
   3729 safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, `A-B' is one
   3730 symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
   3731 
   3732 
   3733 File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   3734 
   3735 3.10.3 Orphan Sections
   3736 ----------------------
   3737 
   3738 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
   3739 explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The
   3740 linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
   3741 to guess as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple
   3742 heuristic to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after
   3743 non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
   3744 loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this
   3745 then it places at the end of the file.
   3746 
   3747    For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
   3748 as well as section flag.
   3749 
   3750 
   3751 File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions
   3752 
   3753 3.10.4 The Location Counter
   3754 ---------------------------
   3755 
   3756 The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
   3757 output location counter.  Since the `.' always refers to a location in
   3758 an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
   3759 `SECTIONS' command.  The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
   3760 ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
   3761 
   3762    Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
   3763 moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
   3764 location counter may never be moved backwards.
   3765 
   3766      SECTIONS
   3767      {
   3768        output :
   3769          {
   3770            file1(.text)
   3771            . = . + 1000;
   3772            file2(.text)
   3773            . += 1000;
   3774            file3(.text)
   3775          } = 0x12345678;
   3776      }
   3777    In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
   3778 at the beginning of the output section `output'.  It is followed by a
   3779 1000 byte gap.  Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
   3780 with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
   3781 The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
   3782 (*note Output Section Fill::).
   3783 
   3784    Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
   3785 current containing object.  Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
   3786 whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
   3787 If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
   3788 byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
   3789 Thus in a script like this:
   3790 
   3791      SECTIONS
   3792      {
   3793          . = 0x100
   3794          .text: {
   3795            *(.text)
   3796            . = 0x200
   3797          }
   3798          . = 0x500
   3799          .data: {
   3800            *(.data)
   3801            . += 0x600
   3802          }
   3803      }
   3804 
   3805    The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
   3806 a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
   3807 `.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
   3808 an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
   3809 backwards).  The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
   3810 an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
   3811 the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
   3812 section itself.
   3813 
   3814    Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
   3815 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
   3816 needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
   3817 
   3818      SECTIONS
   3819      {
   3820          start_of_text = . ;
   3821          .text: { *(.text) }
   3822          end_of_text = . ;
   3823 
   3824          start_of_data = . ;
   3825          .data: { *(.data) }
   3826          end_of_data = . ;
   3827      }
   3828 
   3829    If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
   3830 mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
   3831 `.text' and `.data'.  You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
   3832 on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
   3833 particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
   3834 associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
   3835 assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
   3836 output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
   3837 I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
   3838 script was written as follows:
   3839 
   3840      SECTIONS
   3841      {
   3842          start_of_text = . ;
   3843          .text: { *(.text) }
   3844          end_of_text = . ;
   3845 
   3846          start_of_data = . ;
   3847          .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
   3848          .data: { *(.data) }
   3849          end_of_data = . ;
   3850      }
   3851 
   3852    This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
   3853 `start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
   3854 to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
   3855 assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
   3856 section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
   3857 write:
   3858 
   3859      SECTIONS
   3860      {
   3861          start_of_text = . ;
   3862          .text: { *(.text) }
   3863          end_of_text = . ;
   3864 
   3865          . = . ;
   3866          start_of_data = . ;
   3867          .data: { *(.data) }
   3868          end_of_data = . ;
   3869      }
   3870 
   3871    Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
   3872 `end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
   3873 
   3874 
   3875 File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions
   3876 
   3877 3.10.5 Operators
   3878 ----------------
   3879 
   3880 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
   3881 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
   3882      precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
   3883      (highest)
   3884      1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
   3885      2               left            *  /  %
   3886      3               left            +  -
   3887      4               left            >>  <<
   3888      5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
   3889      6               left            &
   3890      7               left            |
   3891      8               left            &&
   3892      9               left            ||
   3893      10              right           ? :
   3894      11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
   3895      (lowest)
   3896    Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
   3897 
   3898 
   3899 File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions
   3900 
   3901 3.10.6 Evaluation
   3902 -----------------
   3903 
   3904 The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
   3905 an expression when absolutely necessary.
   3906 
   3907    The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
   3908 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
   3909 regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
   3910 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
   3911 
   3912    However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
   3913 until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
   3914 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
   3915 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
   3916 
   3917    The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
   3918 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
   3919 allocation.
   3920 
   3921    Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
   3922 `.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
   3923 
   3924    If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
   3925 available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
   3926 following
   3927      SECTIONS
   3928        {
   3929          .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
   3930            { *(.text) }
   3931        }
   3932 will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
   3933 address'.
   3934 
   3935 
   3936 File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions
   3937 
   3938 3.10.7 The Section of an Expression
   3939 -----------------------------------
   3940 
   3941 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
   3942 or relative to some section.  A relative expression is expressed as a
   3943 fixed offset from the base of a section.
   3944 
   3945    The position of the expression within the linker script determines
   3946 whether it is absolute or relative.  An expression which appears within
   3947 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
   3948 section.  An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
   3949 
   3950    A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you
   3951 request relocatable output using the `-r' option.  That means that a
   3952 further link operation may change the value of the symbol.  The symbol's
   3953 section will be the section of the relative expression.
   3954 
   3955    A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
   3956 through any further link operation.  The symbol will be absolute, and
   3957 will not have any particular associated section.
   3958 
   3959    You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
   3960 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
   3961 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
   3962 section `.data':
   3963      SECTIONS
   3964        {
   3965          .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
   3966        }
   3967    If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
   3968 `.data' section.
   3969 
   3970 
   3971 File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions
   3972 
   3973 3.10.8 Builtin Functions
   3974 ------------------------
   3975 
   3976 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
   3977 use in linker script expressions.
   3978 
   3979 `ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
   3980      Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
   3981      value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
   3982      absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
   3983      symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
   3984      Section::.
   3985 
   3986 `ADDR(SECTION)'
   3987      Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your
   3988      script must previously have defined the location of that section.
   3989      In the following example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned
   3990      identical values:
   3991           SECTIONS { ...
   3992             .output1 :
   3993               {
   3994               start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
   3995               ...
   3996               }
   3997             .output :
   3998               {
   3999               symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
   4000               symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
   4001               }
   4002           ... }
   4003 
   4004 `ALIGN(ALIGN)'
   4005 `ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
   4006      Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
   4007      to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
   4008      change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
   4009      on it.  The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
   4010      be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
   4011      ALIGN)').
   4012 
   4013      Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
   4014      next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
   4015      variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
   4016      input sections:
   4017           SECTIONS { ...
   4018             .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
   4019               *(.data)
   4020               variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
   4021             }
   4022           ... }
   4023      The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
   4024      location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
   4025      attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
   4026      Address::).  The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
   4027      value of a symbol.
   4028 
   4029      The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
   4030 
   4031 `BLOCK(EXP)'
   4032      This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
   4033      scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
   4034      output section.
   4035 
   4036 `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
   4037      This is equivalent to either
   4038           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
   4039      or
   4040           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
   4041      depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
   4042      pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
   4043      expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
   4044      latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
   4045      memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
   4046      bytes in the on-disk file.
   4047 
   4048      This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
   4049      not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
   4050      script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
   4051      should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
   4052      for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
   4053 
   4054      Example:
   4055             . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
   4056 
   4057 `DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
   4058      This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
   4059      evaluation purposes.
   4060 
   4061             . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
   4062 
   4063 `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
   4064      This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
   4065      option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When `-z relro'
   4066      option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
   4067      otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
   4068      aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
   4069      target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
   4070      between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
   4071 
   4072             . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
   4073 
   4074 `DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
   4075      Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
   4076      defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
   4077      return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
   4078      symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
   4079      set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
   4080      section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
   4081      is preserved:
   4082 
   4083           SECTIONS { ...
   4084             .text : {
   4085               begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
   4086               ...
   4087             }
   4088             ...
   4089           }
   4090 
   4091 `LENGTH(MEMORY)'
   4092      Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4093 
   4094 `LOADADDR(SECTION)'
   4095      Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  This is normally
   4096      the same as `ADDR', but it may be different if the `AT' attribute
   4097      is used in the output section definition (*note Output Section
   4098      LMA::).
   4099 
   4100 `MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4101      Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4102 
   4103 `MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4104      Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4105 
   4106 `NEXT(EXP)'
   4107      Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
   4108      This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
   4109      the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
   4110      file, the two functions are equivalent.
   4111 
   4112 `ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
   4113      Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4114 
   4115 `SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
   4116      Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit
   4117      value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
   4118      option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
   4119      DEFAULT.  At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
   4120      used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
   4121      sections, but you use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
   4122 
   4123 `SIZEOF(SECTION)'
   4124      Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
   4125      been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
   4126      evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
   4127      example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
   4128           SECTIONS{ ...
   4129             .output {
   4130               .start = . ;
   4131               ...
   4132               .end = . ;
   4133               }
   4134             symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
   4135             symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
   4136           ... }
   4137 
   4138 `SIZEOF_HEADERS'
   4139 `sizeof_headers'
   4140      Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
   4141      information which appears at the start of the output file.  You
   4142      can use this number when setting the start address of the first
   4143      section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
   4144 
   4145      When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
   4146      `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
   4147      number of program headers before it has determined all the section
   4148      addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
   4149      additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
   4150      room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
   4151      using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
   4152      script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
   4153      headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
   4154      `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
   4155 
   4156 
   4157 File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts
   4158 
   4159 3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
   4160 ============================
   4161 
   4162 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
   4163 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
   4164 linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
   4165 linker will report an error.
   4166 
   4167    An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
   4168 
   4169    Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
   4170 assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
   4171 
   4172    Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
   4173 read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
   4174 script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
   4175 
   4176 
   4177 File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top
   4178 
   4179 4 Machine Dependent Features
   4180 ****************************
   4181 
   4182 `ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
   4183 describe them.  Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
   4184 not listed.
   4185 
   4186 * Menu:
   4187 
   4188 
   4189 * H8/300::                      `ld' and the H8/300
   4190 
   4191 * i960::                        `ld' and the Intel 960 family
   4192 
   4193 * ARM::				`ld' and the ARM family
   4194 
   4195 * HPPA ELF32::                  `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
   4196 
   4197 * MMIX::			`ld' and MMIX
   4198 
   4199 * MSP430::			`ld' and MSP430
   4200 
   4201 * PowerPC ELF32::		`ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4202 
   4203 * PowerPC64 ELF64::		`ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4204 
   4205 * TI COFF::                     `ld' and TI COFF
   4206 
   4207 * WIN32::                       `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   4208 
   4209 * Xtensa::                      `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   4210 
   4211 
   4212 File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4213 
   4214 4.1 `ld' and the H8/300
   4215 =======================
   4216 
   4217 For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
   4218 specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   4219 
   4220 _relaxing address modes_
   4221      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   4222      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   4223      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   4224 
   4225 _synthesizing instructions_
   4226      `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
   4227      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4228      changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
   4229      linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
   4230      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4231 
   4232 _bit manipulation instructions_
   4233      `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
   4234      biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
   4235      bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
   4236      to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
   4237      address form.  (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
   4238      into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
   4239      page of memory).
   4240 
   4241 _system control instructions_
   4242      `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instrcutions which use the 32 bit
   4243      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4244      changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
   4245      turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
   4246      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4247 
   4248 
   4249 File: ld.info,  Node: i960,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4250 
   4251 4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
   4252 =================================
   4253 
   4254 You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
   4255 the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
   4256 specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
   4257 instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
   4258 strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
   4259 specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
   4260 loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
   4261 
   4262    For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
   4263 `-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
   4264 any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
   4265 
   4266      try
   4267      libtry.a
   4268      tryca
   4269      libtryca.a
   4270 
   4271 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
   4272 two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
   4273 
   4274    You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
   4275 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
   4276 each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
   4277 specifies a library.
   4278 
   4279    `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
   4280 specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
   4281 targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
   4282 relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively.  `ld' also turns
   4283 `cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
   4284 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
   4285 not itself call any subroutines).
   4286 
   4287 
   4288 File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4289 
   4290 4.3 `ld' and the ARM family
   4291 ===========================
   4292 
   4293 For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
   4294 betweem ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
   4295 been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
   4296 option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
   4297 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
   4298 option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
   4299 given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
   4300 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
   4301 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
   4302 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
   4303 
   4304    The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
   4305 switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
   4306 sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
   4307 a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
   4308 straight away.
   4309 
   4310    The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
   4311 executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
   4312 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
   4313 
   4314    The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
   4315 `.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
   4316 `R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The `--target1-rel' and
   4317 `--target1-abs' switches override the default.
   4318 
   4319    The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
   4320 `R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for `type', their meanings,
   4321 and target defaults are as follows:
   4322 `rel'
   4323      `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
   4324 
   4325 `abs'
   4326      `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
   4327 
   4328 `got-rel'
   4329      `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
   4330 
   4331    The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
   4332 enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
   4333 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
   4334 but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
   4335 objects.
   4336 
   4337    In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
   4338 linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
   4339 PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
   4340 
   4341    In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
   4342 relocations are ignored.
   4343 
   4344    The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
   4345 instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
   4346 Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
   4347 BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
   4348 entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
   4349 
   4350    This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
   4351 to specify it if you are using that target.
   4352 
   4353 
   4354 File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4355 
   4356 4.4 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
   4357 ====================================
   4358 
   4359 When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
   4360 stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
   4361 `--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
   4362 different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
   4363 sub-spaces.
   4364 
   4365    Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
   4366 sections located between groups of input sections.  `--stub-group-size'
   4367 specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
   4368 stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
   4369 serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
   4370 and one group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that
   4371 require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
   4372 sections only serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for
   4373 `N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   4374 negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
   4375 `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
   4376 groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
   4377 stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
   4378 
   4379    Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   4380 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
   4381 create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
   4382 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
   4383 
   4384 
   4385 File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4386 
   4387 4.5 `ld' and MMIX
   4388 =================
   4389 
   4390 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
   4391 object files when linking.  The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
   4392 format.  The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
   4393 formats.
   4394 
   4395    There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
   4396 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
   4397 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
   4398 symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
   4399 `.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
   4400 register multiplied by 8.  Register `$255' is not included in this
   4401 section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
   4402 `Main' for `mmo' files.
   4403 
   4404    Symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
   4405 `__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special; there must
   4406 be only one each, even if they are local.  The default linker script
   4407 uses these to set the default start address of a section.
   4408 
   4409    Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
   4410 section, are left out from an mmo file.
   4411 
   4412 
   4413 File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4414 
   4415 4.6 `ld' and MSP430
   4416 ===================
   4417 
   4418 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
   4419 `-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
   4420 MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
   4421 the linker).
   4422 
   4423    The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
   4424 specific:
   4425 
   4426 ``.vectors''
   4427      Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
   4428 
   4429 ``.bootloader''
   4430      Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
   4431      code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   4432 
   4433 ``.infomem''
   4434      Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
   4435      this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   4436 
   4437 ``.infomemnobits''
   4438      This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
   4439      this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
   4440 
   4441 ``.noinit''
   4442      Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
   4443 
   4444      The last two sections are used by gcc.
   4445 
   4446 
   4447 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4448 
   4449 4.7 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4450 =======================================
   4451 
   4452 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
   4453 displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
   4454 fit' errors with very large programs.  `--relax' enables the generation
   4455 of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
   4456 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
   4457 be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.
   4458 
   4459 `--bss-plt'
   4460      Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
   4461      code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
   4462      security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
   4463      writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
   4464      `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
   4465      if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
   4466      compiled with `-msecure-plt'.  `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
   4467      (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
   4468 
   4469 `--sdata-got'
   4470      The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
   4471      sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The
   4472      location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
   4473      initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The
   4474      reason for the `.got' change is more subtle:  The new placement
   4475      allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
   4476      relro -z now'.  However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
   4477      always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
   4478      accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
   4479      `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't
   4480      use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
   4481      useful for other compilers that may do so.
   4482 
   4483 `--emit-stub-syms'
   4484      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   4485      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   4486 
   4487 `--no-tls-optimize'
   4488      PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
   4489      used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
   4490      the optimization.
   4491 
   4492 
   4493 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4494 
   4495 4.8 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4496 =========================================
   4497 
   4498 `--stub-group-size'
   4499      Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are
   4500      placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
   4501      sections.  `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
   4502      group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
   4503      offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
   4504      sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
   4505      it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
   4506      it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
   4507      serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for `N'
   4508      chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   4509      negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
   4510      and `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
   4511      section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
   4512      behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
   4513      values of `N' respectively.
   4514 
   4515      Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   4516      single input section larger than the group size specified will of
   4517      course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
   4518      are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
   4519      stub.
   4520 
   4521 `--emit-stub-syms'
   4522      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   4523      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   4524 
   4525 `--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
   4526      These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
   4527      a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
   4528      function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
   4529      a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.').  To
   4530      properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
   4531      to control both `foo' and `.foo'.  The option `--dotsyms', on by
   4532      default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
   4533      Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
   4534 
   4535 `--no-tls-optimize'
   4536      PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
   4537      sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
   4538      disable the optimization.
   4539 
   4540 `--no-opd-optimize'
   4541      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
   4542      corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
   4543      by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker scrip `/DISCARD/'.  Use
   4544      this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
   4545 
   4546 `--non-overlapping-opd'
   4547      Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
   4548      `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
   4549      the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
   4550      next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
   4551 
   4552 `--no-toc-optimize'
   4553      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
   4554      Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
   4555      the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
   4556      a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
   4557      a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
   4558      relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
   4559      unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
   4560      reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
   4561      discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
   4562      reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
   4563      assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
   4564      disable the optimization.
   4565 
   4566 `--no-multi-toc'
   4567      By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
   4568      entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
   4569      total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by
   4570      grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
   4571      its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
   4572      inter-group calls.  `ld' does not split apart input sections, so
   4573      cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that
   4574      exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'.
   4575      Use this option to turn off this feature.
   4576 
   4577 
   4578 File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4579 
   4580 4.9 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
   4581 ===============================================
   4582 
   4583 The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
   4584 versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
   4585 supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
   4586 `ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
   4587 depends on the default specified by the specific target.
   4588 
   4589 
   4590 File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4591 
   4592 4.10 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   4593 ==================================
   4594 
   4595 This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues.  See
   4596 *Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed decription of the
   4597 command line options mentioned here.
   4598 
   4599 _import libraries_
   4600      The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
   4601      libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
   4602      are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
   4603      archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
   4604      for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
   4605      command line option.
   4606 
   4607 _exporting DLL symbols_
   4608      The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
   4609 
   4610     _using auto-export functionality_
   4611           By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
   4612           functionality, which is controlled by the following command
   4613           line options:
   4614 
   4615              * -export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
   4616 
   4617              * -exclude-symbols
   4618 
   4619              * -exclude-libs
   4620 
   4621           If, however, `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly
   4622           on the command line, then the default auto-export behavior
   4623           will be _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
   4624 
   4625              * A DEF file is used.
   4626 
   4627              * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
   4628                __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
   4629 
   4630     _using a DEF file_
   4631           Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
   4632           file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
   4633           should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is
   4634           named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file
   4635           to the linker's command line.  The file's name must end in
   4636           `.def' or `.DEF'.
   4637 
   4638                gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
   4639 
   4640           Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
   4641           unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
   4642 
   4643           Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
   4644           `xyz.dll':
   4645 
   4646                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
   4647 
   4648                EXPORTS
   4649                foo
   4650                bar
   4651                _bar = bar
   4652                another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
   4653                var1 DATA
   4654 
   4655           This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
   4656           and five symbols in the export table. The third exported
   4657           symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
   4658           `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
   4659           and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
   4660           `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
   4661           object.
   4662 
   4663           The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
   4664           name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   4665           the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
   4666 
   4667           When the .DEF file is used to build an application. rather
   4668           than a library, the `NAME <name>' command shoud be used
   4669           instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   4670           the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
   4671 
   4672           With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional
   4673           specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
   4674           non-default base address for the image.
   4675 
   4676           If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor  `NAME <name>' is specified,
   4677           or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
   4678           same as the filename specified on the command line.
   4679 
   4680           The complete specification of an export symbol is:
   4681 
   4682                EXPORTS
   4683                  ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
   4684                     | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
   4685                  [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
   4686 
   4687           Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
   4688           declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or
   4689           declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
   4690           `<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'.  Optionally,
   4691           the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
   4692           `<integer>' alias.
   4693 
   4694           The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
   4695 
   4696           `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
   4697           table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
   4698           (either the value specified by the .def specification or,
   4699           otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
   4700           name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
   4701           any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
   4702 
   4703           `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
   4704           function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
   4705           reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
   4706           be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
   4707 
   4708           `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
   4709           well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
   4710           read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
   4711           to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
   4712           code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
   4713           explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
   4714           attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
   4715 
   4716           `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
   4717           not put it into the static import library used to resolve
   4718           imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
   4719           the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
   4720           using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
   4721           without an import library.
   4722 
   4723           See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
   4724           specification of other DEF file statements
   4725 
   4726           While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
   4727           with the `--output-def <file>' command line option.
   4728 
   4729     _Using decorations_
   4730           Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
   4731           source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
   4732           to be exported is declared as:
   4733 
   4734                __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
   4735                __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
   4736 
   4737           All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
   4738           any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
   4739           in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
   4740           disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
   4741           used.
   4742 
   4743           Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
   4744           _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
   4745           dllimport, instead:
   4746 
   4747                __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
   4748                __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
   4749 
   4750           This complicates the structure of library header files,
   4751           because when included by the library itself the header must
   4752           declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
   4753           included by client code the header must declare them as
   4754           dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
   4755           used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
   4756           declaration completely.  See `--enable-auto-import' and
   4757           `automatic data imports' for more imformation.
   4758 
   4759 _automatic data imports_
   4760      The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
   4761      only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
   4762      let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
   4763      with this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port
   4764      existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
   4765      libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
   4766      initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
   4767      decorations to archieve a behavior that conforms to that on
   4768      POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
   4769      `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
   4770      by default on cygwin/mingw.  The `--enable-auto-import' option
   4771      itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
   4772      ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
   4773 
   4774      auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
   4775      additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
   4776 
   4777      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   4778      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   4779 
   4780      The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
   4781      occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
   4782      difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
   4783      feature, described below.
   4784 
   4785      For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
   4786      classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
   4787      variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
   4788      particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
   4789      the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
   4790      fixing these references at runtime without the additional
   4791      information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
   4792      standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
   4793      these references.
   4794 
   4795      The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
   4796      references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
   4797      adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
   4798      to specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
   4799      versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
   4800      provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
   4801      support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
   4802      compiled result will run without error on an older system.
   4803 
   4804      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
   4805      explicitly enabled as needed.
   4806 
   4807 _direct linking to a dll_
   4808      The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
   4809      including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
   4810      libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than
   4811      does the traditional import library method, expecially when
   4812      linking large libraries or applications.  When `ld' creates an
   4813      import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
   4814      stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
   4815      exports.  The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
   4816      processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
   4817      tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
   4818      particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
   4819 
   4820      Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
   4821      other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
   4822      number of names to match each library.  All that is needed from
   4823      the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
   4824      order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
   4825 
   4826      For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
   4827      attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
   4828 
   4829           libxxx.dll.a
   4830           xxx.dll.a
   4831           libxxx.a
   4832           cygxxx.dll (*)
   4833           libxxx.dll
   4834           xxx.dll
   4835 
   4836      before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
   4837 
   4838      (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
   4839      `<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option
   4840      `--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
   4841      standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
   4842      effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
   4843 
   4844      Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
   4845      use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
   4846      of this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
   4847      conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
   4848      environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
   4849      could coexist on the same machine.
   4850 
   4851      The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
   4852      applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
   4853      libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
   4854 
   4855           bin/
   4856           	cygxxx.dll
   4857           lib/
   4858           	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
   4859           	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
   4860 
   4861      Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
   4862      done two ways:
   4863 
   4864      1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
   4865           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
   4866 
   4867      However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
   4868      names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
   4869      specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
   4870      libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
   4871 
   4872      2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
   4873      directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
   4874      should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
   4875      making the app/dll.
   4876 
   4877           ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
   4878 
   4879      Then you can link without any make environment changes.
   4880 
   4881           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
   4882 
   4883      This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
   4884      the following is perfectly legal
   4885 
   4886           bin/
   4887           	cygxxx-5.dll
   4888           lib/
   4889           	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
   4890 
   4891      Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
   4892      even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
   4893      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
   4894 
   4895      Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
   4896      justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There
   4897      are two reasons:
   4898 
   4899      1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
   4900      work with auto-imported data.
   4901 
   4902      2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
   4903      the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
   4904      indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
   4905      the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
   4906      and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
   4907 
   4908      So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
   4909      true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
   4910      dll, in most cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
   4911      binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
   4912      massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
   4913      requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
   4914      will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
   4915 
   4916 _symbol aliasing_
   4917 
   4918     _adding additional names_
   4919           Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
   4920           names.  A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
   4921           also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
   4922           DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
   4923           optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
   4924           file:
   4925 
   4926                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   4927 
   4928                EXPORTS
   4929                foo
   4930                _foo = foo
   4931 
   4932           The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
   4933 
   4934           Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
   4935           the source code using the "weak" attribute:
   4936 
   4937                void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
   4938                void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
   4939 
   4940           See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
   4941           weak symbols.
   4942 
   4943     _renaming symbols_
   4944           Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
   4945           cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol `_foo' can be
   4946           exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
   4947           directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
   4948           library, if it is created).  In the following example:
   4949 
   4950                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   4951 
   4952                EXPORTS
   4953                _foo = foo
   4954 
   4955           The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
   4956           `_foo'.
   4957 
   4958      Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
   4959      unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
   4960      If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
   4961      _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
   4962      are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
   4963      option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
   4964      use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
   4965      both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
   4966      symbols will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those
   4967      symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
   4968 
   4969 _weak externals_
   4970      The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
   4971      called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the
   4972      symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
   4973      other symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
   4974         * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
   4975           historically called lazy externals.
   4976 
   4977         * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
   4978           libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
   4979 
   4980         * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
   4981           implemented.
   4982      As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
   4983      symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking,
   4984      the symbol uses a default value.
   4985 
   4986 
   4987 File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4988 
   4989 4.11 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   4990 ===============================
   4991 
   4992 The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
   4993 `SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
   4994 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
   4995 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
   4996 example, with the command:
   4997 
   4998      SECTIONS
   4999      {
   5000        .text : {
   5001          *(.literal .text)
   5002        }
   5003      }
   5004 
   5005 `ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
   5006 different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
   5007 range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place
   5008 the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
   5009 `.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the `.literal' sections
   5010 from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
   5011 the files would follow.
   5012 
   5013    Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
   5014 provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
   5015 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
   5016 literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
   5017 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
   5018 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
   5019 the `L32R' instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
   5020 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
   5021 `L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
   5022 `CALLN' instructions.
   5023 
   5024    For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
   5025 optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
   5026 instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
   5027 and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
   5028 not used for anything else.  Removing the `L32R' instruction always
   5029 reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
   5030 alignment of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will
   5031 always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
   5032 between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
   5033 inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
   5034 If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
   5035 option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
   5036 instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
   5037 are required for correctness.
   5038 
   5039    The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
   5040 control the linker:
   5041 
   5042 `--no-relax'
   5043      Since the Xtensa version of `ld' enables the `--relax' option by
   5044      default, the `--no-relax' option is provided to disable relaxation.
   5045 
   5046 `--size-opt'
   5047      When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
   5048      size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
   5049      insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
   5050      target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
   5051      required to preserve the correctness of the code.
   5052 
   5053 
   5054 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top
   5055 
   5056 5 BFD
   5057 *****
   5058 
   5059 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
   5060 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
   5061 object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
   5062 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
   5063 it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
   5064 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
   5065 object file formats available.  You can use `objdump -i' (*note
   5066 objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
   5067 your configuration.
   5068 
   5069    As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
   5070 conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
   5071 efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
   5072 would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
   5073 offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
   5074 back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
   5075 greater speed.
   5076 
   5077    One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
   5078 is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
   5079 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
   5080 conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
   5081 
   5082 * Menu:
   5083 
   5084 * BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
   5085 
   5086 
   5087 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD
   5088 
   5089 5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
   5090 ===================================
   5091 
   5092 When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
   5093 the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
   5094 memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
   5095 the object file's data structures.
   5096 
   5097    As different information from the object files is required, BFD
   5098 reads from different sections of the file and processes them.  For
   5099 example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
   5100 tables.  Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
   5101 the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
   5102 format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
   5103 calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
   5104 back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form.  The
   5105 linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
   5106 and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
   5107 end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
   5108 convert it into the chosen output format.
   5109 
   5110 * Menu:
   5111 
   5112 * BFD information loss::	Information Loss
   5113 * Canonical format::		The BFD	canonical object-file format
   5114 
   5115 
   5116 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline
   5117 
   5118 5.1.1 Information Loss
   5119 ----------------------
   5120 
   5121 _Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
   5122 by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
   5123 be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
   5124 example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
   5125 in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
   5126 contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
   5127 image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
   5128 output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
   5129 internally, so the link is performed correctly).
   5130 
   5131    Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
   5132 unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
   5133 the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
   5134 (e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
   5135 the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
   5136 describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
   5137 command language.
   5138 
   5139    _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
   5140 canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
   5141 structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
   5142 internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
   5143 possible data richness through the transformation between external to
   5144 internal and back to external formats.
   5145 
   5146    This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
   5147 format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
   5148 maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
   5149 form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
   5150 to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
   5151 is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
   5152 end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
   5153 is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
   5154 able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
   5155 information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
   5156 commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
   5157 linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
   5158 `b.out'.  When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
   5159 lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
   5160 
   5161 
   5162 File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline
   5163 
   5164 5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
   5165 ------------------------------------------
   5166 
   5167 The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
   5168 least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
   5169 that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
   5170 format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
   5171 understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
   5172 conversions.  
   5173 
   5174 _files_
   5175      Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
   5176      architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
   5177      pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
   5178      magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
   5179      so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
   5180      write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
   5181      stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
   5182      files may be used with one another.
   5183 
   5184 _sections_
   5185      Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
   5186      the section's original address in the object file, size and
   5187      alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
   5188      data structures.
   5189 
   5190 _symbols_
   5191      Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
   5192      file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
   5193      flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
   5194      relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
   5195      section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
   5196      symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
   5197      varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
   5198      the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
   5199      for that symbol is accessible.  `ld' can operate on a collection
   5200      of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
   5201 
   5202      Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
   5203      so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
   5204      pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
   5205      Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
   5206      information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
   5207      This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
   5208      linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
   5209 
   5210      There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
   5211      format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
   5212      example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
   5213      within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
   5214      information will be preserved.
   5215 
   5216 _relocation level_
   5217      Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
   5218      symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
   5219      section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
   5220      descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
   5221      the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
   5222      relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
   5223      method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
   5224      instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
   5225      record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
   5226      routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
   5227      byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
   5228      such relocation type.
   5229 
   5230 _line numbers_
   5231      Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
   5232      mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
   5233      output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
   5234      symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
   5235      number records points to the first record of the list.  The head
   5236      of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
   5237      allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
   5238      is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
   5239      offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
   5240      simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
   5241      formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
   5242 
   5243 
   5244 File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top
   5245 
   5246 6 Reporting Bugs
   5247 ****************
   5248 
   5249 Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
   5250 
   5251    Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
   5252 or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
   5253 is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
   5254 better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
   5255 
   5256    In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
   5257 information that enables us to fix the bug.
   5258 
   5259 * Menu:
   5260 
   5261 * Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
   5262 * Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
   5263 
   5264 
   5265 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   5266 
   5267 6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
   5268 =========================
   5269 
   5270 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
   5271 guidelines:
   5272 
   5273    * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
   5274      a `ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
   5275 
   5276    * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
   5277 
   5278    * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
   5279      may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
   5280      object files are correct.
   5281 
   5282    * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
   5283      improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
   5284 
   5285 
   5286 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   5287 
   5288 6.2 How to Report Bugs
   5289 ======================
   5290 
   5291 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
   5292 If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
   5293 contact that organization first.
   5294 
   5295    You can find contact information for many support companies and
   5296 individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
   5297 
   5298    Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to `bug-binutils (a] gnu.org'.
   5299 
   5300    The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
   5301 *report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
   5302 leave it out, state it!
   5303 
   5304    Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
   5305 problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
   5306 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
   5307 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug
   5308 is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
   5309 where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
   5310 different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
   5311 doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
   5312 specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
   5313 and the most helpful.
   5314 
   5315    Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
   5316 the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
   5317 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
   5318 
   5319    Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
   5320 bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
   5321 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
   5322 might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
   5323 
   5324    To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
   5325 
   5326    * The version of `ld'.  `ld' announces it if you start it with the
   5327      `--version' argument.
   5328 
   5329      Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
   5330      looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
   5331 
   5332    * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
   5333      patches made to the `BFD' library.
   5334 
   5335    * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
   5336      and version number.
   5337 
   5338    * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
   5339      "`gcc-2.7'".
   5340 
   5341    * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
   5342      observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
   5343      important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
   5344      from make) is sufficient.
   5345 
   5346      If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
   5347      wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
   5348 
   5349    * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
   5350      the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
   5351      files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
   5352      10K.  For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
   5353      or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
   5354      file(s) to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be
   5355      going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
   5356      large attachments).  But small attachments are best.
   5357 
   5358      If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
   5359      `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
   5360      object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
   5361      `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
   5362      `gas' or `gcc' were configured.
   5363 
   5364    * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
   5365      incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
   5366 
   5367      Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
   5368      will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
   5369      might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
   5370      not give us a chance to make a mistake.
   5371 
   5372      Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
   5373      still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
   5374      such as, your copy of `ld' is out of synch, or you have
   5375      encountered a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has
   5376      happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told
   5377      us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know
   5378      that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
   5379      expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion
   5380      from our observations.
   5381 
   5382    * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
   5383      diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
   5384      Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
   5385      discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
   5386      by line number.
   5387 
   5388      The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
   5389      in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
   5390      information to us.
   5391 
   5392    Here are some things that are not necessary:
   5393 
   5394    * A description of the envelope of the bug.
   5395 
   5396      Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
   5397      which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
   5398      changes will not affect it.
   5399 
   5400      This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
   5401      we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
   5402      debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
   5403      examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
   5404 
   5405      Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
   5406      of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
   5407      output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
   5408      less time, and so on.
   5409 
   5410      However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
   5411      this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
   5412      used.
   5413 
   5414    * A patch for the bug.
   5415 
   5416      A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
   5417      omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
   5418      assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
   5419      with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
   5420      might not understand it at all.
   5421 
   5422      Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
   5423      construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
   5424      path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
   5425      not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
   5426      that the bug is fixed.
   5427 
   5428      And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
   5429      your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
   5430      test case will help us to understand.
   5431 
   5432    * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
   5433 
   5434      Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
   5435      such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
   5436 
   5437 
   5438 File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top
   5439 
   5440 Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
   5441 **************************************
   5442 
   5443 To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
   5444 `ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
   5445 more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
   5446 Scripts::.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
   5447 set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'.  GNU `ld'
   5448 supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
   5449 described here.
   5450 
   5451    In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
   5452 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
   5453 features to make use of them.
   5454 
   5455    You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
   5456 `-c' command-line option.
   5457 
   5458    Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
   5459 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
   5460 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
   5461 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
   5462 a warning message, but continues processing the script.
   5463 
   5464    Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
   5465 
   5466    You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
   5467 lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'.  The following
   5468 list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
   5469 
   5470 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
   5471 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   5472      Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
   5473      the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
   5474      use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
   5475      present in your output program.  If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
   5476      at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
   5477      `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
   5478      still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
   5479      line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
   5480 
   5481 `ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
   5482      Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
   5483      in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
   5484 
   5485      IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
   5486 
   5487 `ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
   5488      Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
   5489      should be a power of two.
   5490 
   5491 `BASE EXPRESSION'
   5492      Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
   5493      absolute addresses) in the output file.
   5494 
   5495 `CHIP EXPRESSION'
   5496 `CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
   5497      This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
   5498 
   5499 `END'
   5500      This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
   5501      compatibility.
   5502 
   5503 `FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   5504      Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
   5505      language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
   5506 
   5507        1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
   5508 
   5509        2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
   5510 
   5511        3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
   5512           `COFF'
   5513 
   5514 `LIST ANYTHING...'
   5515      Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
   5516      `ld' command-line option `-M'.
   5517 
   5518      The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
   5519      with no change in its effect.
   5520 
   5521 `LOAD FILENAME'
   5522 `LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
   5523      Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
   5524      same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
   5525      line.
   5526 
   5527 `NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
   5528      OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
   5529      MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
   5530      option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
   5531 
   5532 `ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   5533 `ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
   5534      Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
   5535      in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
   5536      MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
   5537      `ORDER' command.  The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
   5538      first in your output file, in the order specified.
   5539 
   5540 `PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
   5541 `PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
   5542 `PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
   5543      Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
   5544      linker input files.
   5545 
   5546 `SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
   5547 `SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
   5548 `SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
   5549      You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
   5550      specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If
   5551      you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
   5552      the _first_ sets the start address.
   5553 
   5554 
   5555 File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top
   5556 
   5557 Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
   5558 *****************************************
   5559 
   5560                         Version 1.1, March 2000
   5561 
   5562      Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
   5563      51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
   5564 
   5565      Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
   5566      of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
   5567 
   5568 
   5569   0. PREAMBLE
   5570 
   5571      The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
   5572      written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
   5573      the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
   5574      modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily,
   5575      this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
   5576      credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
   5577      modifications made by others.
   5578 
   5579      This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
   5580      works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
   5581      It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
   5582      license designed for free software.
   5583 
   5584      We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
   5585      free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
   5586      free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
   5587      that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
   5588      software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
   5589      of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
   5590      We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
   5591      instruction or reference.
   5592 
   5593 
   5594   1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
   5595 
   5596      This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
   5597      notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
   5598      under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to
   5599      any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee,
   5600      and is addressed as "you."
   5601 
   5602      A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
   5603      Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
   5604      modifications and/or translated into another language.
   5605 
   5606      A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter
   5607      section of the Document that deals exclusively with the
   5608      relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the
   5609      Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains
   5610      nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject.
   5611      (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of
   5612      mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.)
   5613      The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with
   5614      the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial,
   5615      philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
   5616 
   5617      The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
   5618      titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
   5619      the notice that says that the Document is released under this
   5620      License.
   5621 
   5622      The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
   5623      listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
   5624      that says that the Document is released under this License.
   5625 
   5626      A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
   5627      represented in a format whose specification is available to the
   5628      general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
   5629      and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
   5630      composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
   5631      widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
   5632      text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
   5633      formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
   5634      otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed
   5635      to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
   5636      Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
   5637 
   5638      Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
   5639      ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
   5640      SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
   5641      standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification.
   5642      Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that
   5643      can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML
   5644      or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
   5645      available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word
   5646      processors for output purposes only.
   5647 
   5648      The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
   5649      plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
   5650      material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
   5651      works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
   5652      Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
   5653      work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
   5654 
   5655   2. VERBATIM COPYING
   5656 
   5657      You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
   5658      commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
   5659      copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
   5660      applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
   5661      add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
   5662      may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
   5663      or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
   5664      you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
   5665      distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
   5666      the conditions in section 3.
   5667 
   5668      You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
   5669      and you may publicly display copies.
   5670 
   5671   3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
   5672 
   5673      If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
   5674      100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
   5675      must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
   5676      all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
   5677      Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
   5678      and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
   5679      front cover must present the full title with all words of the
   5680      title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
   5681      on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
   5682      covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
   5683      satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
   5684      other respects.
   5685 
   5686      If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
   5687      legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
   5688      reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
   5689      adjacent pages.
   5690 
   5691      If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
   5692      numbering more than 100, you must either include a
   5693      machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
   5694      state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible
   5695      computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy
   5696      of the Document, free of added material, which the general
   5697      network-using public has access to download anonymously at no
   5698      charge using public-standard network protocols.  If you use the
   5699      latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
   5700      begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
   5701      this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
   5702      location until at least one year after the last time you
   5703      distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
   5704      retailers) of that edition to the public.
   5705 
   5706      It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
   5707      the Document well before redistributing any large number of
   5708      copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
   5709      version of the Document.
   5710 
   5711   4. MODIFICATIONS
   5712 
   5713      You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
   5714      under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
   5715      release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
   5716      the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
   5717      licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
   5718      whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
   5719      things in the Modified Version:
   5720 
   5721      A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
   5722      distinct    from that of the Document, and from those of previous
   5723      versions    (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
   5724      History section    of the Document).  You may use the same title
   5725      as a previous version    if the original publisher of that version
   5726      gives permission.
   5727      B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
   5728      entities    responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
   5729      Modified    Version, together with at least five of the principal
   5730      authors of the    Document (all of its principal authors, if it
   5731      has less than five).
   5732      C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
   5733      Modified Version, as the publisher.
   5734      D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
   5735      E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
   5736      adjacent to the other copyright notices.
   5737      F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
   5738      notice    giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
   5739      under the    terms of this License, in the form shown in the
   5740      Addendum below.
   5741      G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
   5742      Sections    and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
   5743      license notice.
   5744      H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
   5745      I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
   5746      to    it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
   5747        publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.
   5748      If    there is no section entitled "History" in the Document,
   5749      create one    stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of
   5750      the Document as    given on its Title Page, then add an item
   5751      describing the Modified    Version as stated in the previous
   5752      sentence.
   5753      J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
   5754        public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
   5755      likewise    the network locations given in the Document for
   5756      previous versions    it was based on.  These may be placed in the
   5757      "History" section.     You may omit a network location for a work
   5758      that was published at    least four years before the Document
   5759      itself, or if the original    publisher of the version it refers
   5760      to gives permission.
   5761      K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
   5762      preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
   5763       substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
   5764      and/or dedications given therein.
   5765      L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
   5766      unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
   5767      or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
   5768      M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section
   5769      may not be included in the Modified Version.
   5770      N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements"    or to
   5771      conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
   5772 
   5773      If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
   5774      appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
   5775      material copied from the Document, you may at your option
   5776      designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
   5777      add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
   5778      Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
   5779      other section titles.
   5780 
   5781      You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
   5782      nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
   5783      parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
   5784      been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition
   5785      of a standard.
   5786 
   5787      You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
   5788      and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
   5789      of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
   5790      passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
   5791      added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
   5792      Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
   5793      previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
   5794      you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
   5795      replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
   5796      publisher that added the old one.
   5797 
   5798      The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
   5799      License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
   5800      assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
   5801 
   5802   5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
   5803 
   5804      You may combine the Document with other documents released under
   5805      this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
   5806      modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
   5807      all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
   5808      unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
   5809      combined work in its license notice.
   5810 
   5811      The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
   5812      multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
   5813      copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
   5814      but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
   5815      by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
   5816      original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
   5817      unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
   5818      the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
   5819      combined work.
   5820 
   5821      In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
   5822      "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
   5823      entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
   5824      "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You
   5825      must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
   5826 
   5827   6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
   5828 
   5829      You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
   5830      documents released under this License, and replace the individual
   5831      copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
   5832      that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
   5833      rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
   5834      documents in all other respects.
   5835 
   5836      You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
   5837      distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
   5838      a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
   5839      this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
   5840      that document.
   5841 
   5842   7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
   5843 
   5844      A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
   5845      separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
   5846      a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
   5847      Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation
   5848      copyright is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is
   5849      called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the
   5850      other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on
   5851      account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves
   5852      derivative works of the Document.
   5853 
   5854      If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
   5855      copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
   5856      quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
   5857      placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
   5858      aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
   5859      aggregate.
   5860 
   5861   8. TRANSLATION
   5862 
   5863      Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
   5864      distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
   5865      4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
   5866      permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
   5867      translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
   5868      original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
   5869      translation of this License provided that you also include the
   5870      original English version of this License.  In case of a
   5871      disagreement between the translation and the original English
   5872      version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
   5873 
   5874   9. TERMINATION
   5875 
   5876      You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
   5877      except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
   5878      attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
   5879      void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
   5880      License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
   5881      from you under this License will not have their licenses
   5882      terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
   5883 
   5884  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
   5885 
   5886      The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
   5887      the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
   5888      versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
   5889      differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
   5890      http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
   5891 
   5892      Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
   5893      number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
   5894      version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
   5895      have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
   5896      that specified version or of any later version that has been
   5897      published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
   5898      the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
   5899      you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
   5900      Free Software Foundation.
   5901 
   5902 
   5903 ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
   5904 ====================================================
   5905 
   5906 To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
   5907 the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
   5908 notices just after the title page:
   5909 
   5910      Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
   5911      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
   5912      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
   5913      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
   5914      with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
   5915      Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
   5916      A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
   5917      Free Documentation License."
   5918 
   5919    If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
   5920 instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover
   5921 Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
   5922 LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
   5923 
   5924    If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
   5925 recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
   5926 free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
   5927 permit their use in free software.
   5928 
   5929 
   5930 File: ld.info,  Node: Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top
   5931 
   5932 Index
   5933 *****
   5934 
   5935 [index]
   5936 * Menu:
   5937 
   5938 * ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
   5939 * -(:                                    Options.            (line  609)
   5940 * --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  627)
   5941 * --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  649)
   5942 * --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1343)
   5943 * --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line  819)
   5944 * --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line  825)
   5945 * --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  104)
   5946 * --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  637)
   5947 * --auxiliary:                           Options.            (line  205)
   5948 * --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1348)
   5949 * --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   23)
   5950 * --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   5951 * --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  701)
   5952 * --cref:                                Options.            (line  711)
   5953 * --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line  853)
   5954 * --default-symver:                      Options.            (line  849)
   5955 * --defsym SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  739)
   5956 * --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  752)
   5957 * --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1495)
   5958 * --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1624)
   5959 * --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1295)
   5960 * --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1637)
   5961 * --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1358)
   5962 * --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  513)
   5963 * --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  517)
   5964 * --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1353)
   5965 * --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1501)
   5966 * --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   5967 * --dynamic-linker FILE:                 Options.            (line  765)
   5968 * --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1291)
   5969 * --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  415)
   5970 * --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   5971 * --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC ELF32.      (line   37)
   5972 * --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1487)
   5973 * --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1510)
   5974 * --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1642)
   5975 * --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1295)
   5976 * --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1629)
   5977 * --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1358)
   5978 * --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  158)
   5979 * --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1244)
   5980 * --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  168)
   5981 * --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1400)
   5982 * --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1376)
   5983 * --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  179)
   5984 * --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  771)
   5985 * --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1406)
   5986 * --filter:                              Options.            (line  226)
   5987 * --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   44)
   5988 * --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  424)
   5989 * --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  774)
   5990 * --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  115)
   5991 * --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   5992 * --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  784)
   5993 * --gpsize:                              Options.            (line  259)
   5994 * --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1304)
   5995 * --heap:                                Options.            (line 1412)
   5996 * --help:                                Options.            (line  792)
   5997 * --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1419)
   5998 * --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  447)
   5999 * --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1428)
   6000 * --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1433)
   6001 * --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  315)
   6002 * --library=ARCHIVE:                     Options.            (line  285)
   6003 * --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1442)
   6004 * --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1447)
   6005 * --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1451)
   6006 * --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1456)
   6007 * --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1461)
   6008 * --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1465)
   6009 * --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  139)
   6010 * --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   6011 * --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  384)
   6012 * --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  627)
   6013 * --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  649)
   6014 * --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line  825)
   6015 * --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  637)
   6016 * --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  701)
   6017 * --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  723)
   6018 * --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  752)
   6019 * --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6020 * --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  784)
   6021 * --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  804)
   6022 * --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   6023 * --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  398)
   6024 * --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   6025 * --no-relax:                            Xtensa.             (line   56)
   6026 * --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   6027 * --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC ELF32.      (line   41)
   6028 * --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   6029 * --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  811)
   6030 * --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line  844)
   6031 * --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line  857)
   6032 * --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line  866)
   6033 * --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line  870)
   6034 * --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   6035 * --oformat:                             Options.            (line  882)
   6036 * --omagic:                              Options.            (line  389)
   6037 * --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1478)
   6038 * --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1470)
   6039 * --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  404)
   6040 * --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line  895)
   6041 * --print-map:                           Options.            (line  347)
   6042 * --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1312)
   6043 * --relax:                               Options.            (line  911)
   6044 * --relax on i960:                       i960.               (line   31)
   6045 * --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   6046 * --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
   6047 * --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  428)
   6048 * --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  471)
   6049 * --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   23)
   6050 * --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1647)
   6051 * --section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1081)
   6052 * --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1028)
   6053 * --sort-section alignment:              Options.            (line 1038)
   6054 * --sort-section name:                   Options.            (line 1034)
   6055 * --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1042)
   6056 * --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1047)
   6057 * --stack:                               Options.            (line 1653)
   6058 * --stats:                               Options.            (line 1060)
   6059 * --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  458)
   6060 * --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  462)
   6061 * --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6062 * --stub-group-size=N:                   HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   6063 * --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1660)
   6064 * --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
   6065 * --sysroot:                             Options.            (line 1064)
   6066 * --target-help:                         Options.            (line  796)
   6067 * --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   27)
   6068 * --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   27)
   6069 * --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   32)
   6070 * --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
   6071 * --trace:                               Options.            (line  467)
   6072 * --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  522)
   6073 * --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1069)
   6074 * --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  480)
   6075 * --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  498)
   6076 * --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1096)
   6077 * --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   57)
   6078 * --verbose:                             Options.            (line 1125)
   6079 * --version:                             Options.            (line  507)
   6080 * --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1131)
   6081 * --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1138)
   6082 * --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1206)
   6083 * --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1211)
   6084 * --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1225)
   6085 * --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1229)
   6086 * --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1236)
   6087 * --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1239)
   6088 * --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1248)
   6089 * --wrap:                                Options.            (line 1262)
   6090 * -AARCH:                                Options.            (line  103)
   6091 * -aKEYWORD:                             Options.            (line   96)
   6092 * -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  659)
   6093 * -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  115)
   6094 * -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  662)
   6095 * -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  672)
   6096 * -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1020)
   6097 * -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  679)
   6098 * -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  694)
   6099 * -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  139)
   6100 * -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  662)
   6101 * -d:                                    Options.            (line  149)
   6102 * -dc:                                   Options.            (line  149)
   6103 * -dn:                                   Options.            (line  679)
   6104 * -dp:                                   Options.            (line  149)
   6105 * -dy:                                   Options.            (line  662)
   6106 * -E:                                    Options.            (line  179)
   6107 * -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  158)
   6108 * -EB:                                   Options.            (line  198)
   6109 * -EL:                                   Options.            (line  201)
   6110 * -F:                                    Options.            (line  226)
   6111 * -f:                                    Options.            (line  205)
   6112 * -fini:                                 Options.            (line  250)
   6113 * -g:                                    Options.            (line  256)
   6114 * -G:                                    Options.            (line  259)
   6115 * -hNAME:                                Options.            (line  267)
   6116 * -i:                                    Options.            (line  276)
   6117 * -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  765)
   6118 * -init:                                 Options.            (line  279)
   6119 * -lARCHIVE:                             Options.            (line  285)
   6120 * -LDIR:                                 Options.            (line  315)
   6121 * -M:                                    Options.            (line  347)
   6122 * -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  337)
   6123 * -Map:                                  Options.            (line  800)
   6124 * -n:                                    Options.            (line  384)
   6125 * -N:                                    Options.            (line  389)
   6126 * -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  679)
   6127 * -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line  876)
   6128 * -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  410)
   6129 * -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  404)
   6130 * -pie:                                  Options.            (line  895)
   6131 * -q:                                    Options.            (line  415)
   6132 * -qmagic:                               Options.            (line  905)
   6133 * -Qy:                                   Options.            (line  908)
   6134 * -r:                                    Options.            (line  428)
   6135 * -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  447)
   6136 * -rpath:                                Options.            (line  945)
   6137 * -rpath-link:                           Options.            (line  967)
   6138 * -S:                                    Options.            (line  462)
   6139 * -s:                                    Options.            (line  458)
   6140 * -shared:                               Options.            (line 1020)
   6141 * -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  267)
   6142 * -static:                               Options.            (line  679)
   6143 * -t:                                    Options.            (line  467)
   6144 * -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  471)
   6145 * -Tbss ORG:                             Options.            (line 1090)
   6146 * -Tdata ORG:                            Options.            (line 1090)
   6147 * -Ttext ORG:                            Options.            (line 1090)
   6148 * -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  480)
   6149 * -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  488)
   6150 * -V:                                    Options.            (line  507)
   6151 * -v:                                    Options.            (line  507)
   6152 * -x:                                    Options.            (line  513)
   6153 * -X:                                    Options.            (line  517)
   6154 * -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  531)
   6155 * -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  522)
   6156 * -z defs:                               Options.            (line  811)
   6157 * -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  535)
   6158 * -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line  819)
   6159 * .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6160 * /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
   6161                                                              (line   18)
   6162 * :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
   6163                                                              (line    6)
   6164 * =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
   6165                                                              (line    6)
   6166 * >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
   6167                                                              (line    6)
   6168 * [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
   6169                                                              (line   29)
   6170 * ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   33)
   6171 * absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   6172 * absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   6173 * ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   6174 * ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   6175 * address, section:                      Output Section Address.
   6176                                                              (line    6)
   6177 * ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   44)
   6178 * ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   50)
   6179 * align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6180 * align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6181 * ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6182 * ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6183 * ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
   6184                                                              (line    6)
   6185 * allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6186 * architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
   6187                                                              (line   46)
   6188 * architectures:                         Options.            (line  103)
   6189 * archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  285)
   6190 * archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   71)
   6191 * arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
   6192 * arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
   6193 * ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
   6194 * AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   51)
   6195 * ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6196                                                              (line    9)
   6197 * assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
   6198                                                              (line    9)
   6199 * assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
   6200 * AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6201 * AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6202 * automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  170)
   6203 * back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
   6204 * BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   54)
   6205 * BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   23)
   6206 * BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
   6207 * BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
   6208 * big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  198)
   6209 * binary input format:                   Options.            (line  115)
   6210 * BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
   6211 * bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
   6212 * bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   6213 * bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   6214 * BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6215                                                              (line    6)
   6216 * C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
   6217                                                              (line   19)
   6218 * CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   58)
   6219 * COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   6220 * combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1138)
   6221 * command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
   6222 * command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
   6223 * common allocation:                     Options.            (line  723)
   6224 * common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
   6225                                                              (line   20)
   6226 * common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
   6227                                                              (line    6)
   6228 * compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  139)
   6229 * constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
   6230 * constructors:                          Options.            (line  488)
   6231 * CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
   6232                                                              (line   19)
   6233 * constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
   6234                                                              (line   19)
   6235 * crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6236 * CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
   6237                                                              (line    9)
   6238 * creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  137)
   6239 * cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  711)
   6240 * cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
   6241                                                              (line   30)
   6242 * current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6243 * data:                                  Output Section Data.
   6244                                                              (line    6)
   6245 * DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
   6246                                                              (line   67)
   6247 * DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line   88)
   6248 * DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line   94)
   6249 * dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1074)
   6250 * DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1470)
   6251 * default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
   6252 * default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
   6253 * DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  105)
   6254 * deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  513)
   6255 * demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   6256 * demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  752)
   6257 * direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  218)
   6258 * discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
   6259                                                              (line    6)
   6260 * discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6261 * DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1470)
   6262 * DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1501)
   6263 * dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6264 * dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   34)
   6265 * dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   64)
   6266 * dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  765)
   6267 * dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  179)
   6268 * ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6269 * emulation:                             Options.            (line  337)
   6270 * emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
   6271 * END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   62)
   6272 * endianness:                            Options.            (line  198)
   6273 * entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6274 * entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  158)
   6275 * entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
   6276 * ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6277 * error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
   6278 * example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
   6279 * exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   19)
   6280 * expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
   6281 * expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
   6282 * expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   6283 * expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
   6284 * EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6285                                                              (line   13)
   6286 * fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6287 * file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   6288                                                              (line    6)
   6289 * FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   61)
   6290 * filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
   6291                                                              (line    9)
   6292 * fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
   6293                                                              (line    6)
   6294 * FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6295                                                              (line   39)
   6296 * finalization function:                 Options.            (line  250)
   6297 * first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   79)
   6298 * first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6299 * FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   44)
   6300 * FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
   6301                                                              (line   20)
   6302 * forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
   6303                                                              (line    6)
   6304 * forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
   6305                                                              (line    6)
   6306 * forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  424)
   6307 * FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   66)
   6308 * functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
   6309 * garbage collection <1>:                Options.            (line  784)
   6310 * garbage collection:                    Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   6311 * generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  410)
   6312 * GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
   6313 * GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
   6314 * GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   44)
   6315 * grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   44)
   6316 * groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  609)
   6317 * H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
   6318 * header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  170)
   6319 * heap size:                             Options.            (line 1412)
   6320 * help:                                  Options.            (line  792)
   6321 * holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
   6322 * holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
   6323                                                              (line   39)
   6324 * HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   6325 * HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   6326 * i960 support:                          i960.               (line    6)
   6327 * image base:                            Options.            (line 1419)
   6328 * implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
   6329                                                              (line    6)
   6330 * import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
   6331 * INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
   6332 * including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
   6333 * including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1248)
   6334 * incremental link:                      Options.            (line  276)
   6335 * INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
   6336                                                              (line   25)
   6337 * initialization function:               Options.            (line  279)
   6338 * initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   21)
   6339 * input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
   6340 * input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
   6341                                                              (line    9)
   6342 * input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   16)
   6343 * input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  467)
   6344 * input format:                          Options.            (line  115)
   6345 * input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   16)
   6346 * input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
   6347                                                              (line    6)
   6348 * input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
   6349                                                              (line    6)
   6350 * input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
   6351                                                              (line    6)
   6352 * input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
   6353 * INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   16)
   6354 * integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
   6355 * integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   12)
   6356 * internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
   6357 * invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
   6358 * K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
   6359 * KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   6360 * l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6361 * L, deleting symbols beginning:         Options.            (line  517)
   6362 * lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
   6363 * ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   6364 * LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
   6365 * len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6366 * LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6367 * LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  122)
   6368 * library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   71)
   6369 * link map:                              Options.            (line  347)
   6370 * link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line  967)
   6371 * linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6372 * linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
   6373                                                              (line    6)
   6374 * linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
   6375 * linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
   6376 * linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
   6377 * linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   16)
   6378 * linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
   6379 * linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
   6380 * LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   77)
   6381 * little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  201)
   6382 * LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   84)
   6383 * load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6384 * LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  125)
   6385 * loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
   6386                                                              (line   22)
   6387 * local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  517)
   6388 * location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6389 * LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6390                                                              (line    6)
   6391 * M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
   6392 * machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   6393                                                              (line   46)
   6394 * machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
   6395 * mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
   6396 * MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  130)
   6397 * MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6398 * memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   32)
   6399 * memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6400 * memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
   6401                                                              (line    6)
   6402 * memory usage:                          Options.            (line  804)
   6403 * MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  133)
   6404 * MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
   6405 * MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
   6406 * NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   90)
   6407 * name, section:                         Output Section Name.
   6408                                                              (line    6)
   6409 * names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
   6410 * naming the output file:                Options.            (line  404)
   6411 * NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  137)
   6412 * NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  384)
   6413 * NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
   6414                                                              (line   30)
   6415 * NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
   6416                                                              (line   22)
   6417 * not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  175)
   6418 * o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6419 * objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
   6420 * object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
   6421 * object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
   6422 * object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
   6423 * object size:                           Options.            (line  259)
   6424 * OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  389)
   6425 * opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
   6426 * operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
   6427 * options:                               Options.            (line    6)
   6428 * ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   95)
   6429 * org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6430 * ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6431 * ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  143)
   6432 * orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
   6433 * output file after errors:              Options.            (line  870)
   6434 * output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
   6435 * output file name in linker scripot:    File Commands.      (line   61)
   6436 * output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
   6437                                                              (line    6)
   6438 * output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
   6439                                                              (line    6)
   6440 * output section data:                   Output Section Data.
   6441                                                              (line    6)
   6442 * OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   61)
   6443 * OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   6444                                                              (line   46)
   6445 * OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
   6446 * OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
   6447                                                              (line    6)
   6448 * overlays:                              Overlay Description.
   6449                                                              (line    6)
   6450 * partial link:                          Options.            (line  428)
   6451 * PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line   61)
   6452 * position independent executables:      Options.            (line  897)
   6453 * PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6454 * PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   23)
   6455 * PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   6456 * PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6457 * PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   37)
   6458 * PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   41)
   6459 * PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6460 * PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6461 * PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   6462 * PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   6463 * PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   6464 * PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6465 * PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   6466 * PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   6467 * PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   6468 * precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
   6469 * prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
   6470                                                              (line   22)
   6471 * program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6472 * program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
   6473                                                              (line    6)
   6474 * program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  175)
   6475 * program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6476 * PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
   6477 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
   6478 * PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line  103)
   6479 * QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6480                                                              (line    6)
   6481 * quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
   6482 * read-only text:                        Options.            (line  384)
   6483 * read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  389)
   6484 * regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6485 * relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   6486 * relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line  911)
   6487 * relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
   6488 * relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line   31)
   6489 * relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
   6490 * relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   6491 * relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  428)
   6492 * removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
   6493                                                              (line    6)
   6494 * reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   6495 * requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
   6496 * retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  415)
   6497 * retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line  931)
   6498 * ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   21)
   6499 * round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6500 * round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6501 * runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  267)
   6502 * runtime library search path:           Options.            (line  945)
   6503 * runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  196)
   6504 * scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   12)
   6505 * scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
   6506                                                              (line   20)
   6507 * script files:                          Options.            (line  471)
   6508 * scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
   6509 * search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  315)
   6510 * search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   71)
   6511 * SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   71)
   6512 * SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  109)
   6513 * section address:                       Output Section Address.
   6514                                                              (line    6)
   6515 * section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   6516 * section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1229)
   6517 * section data:                          Output Section Data.
   6518                                                              (line    6)
   6519 * section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
   6520                                                              (line    6)
   6521 * section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6522 * section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  125)
   6523 * section name:                          Output Section Name.
   6524                                                              (line    6)
   6525 * section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
   6526                                                              (line    6)
   6527 * section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  154)
   6528 * section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
   6529                                                              (line    6)
   6530 * section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
   6531                                                              (line    6)
   6532 * SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
   6533 * sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
   6534                                                              (line    6)
   6535 * segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1090)
   6536 * SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  146)
   6537 * segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6538 * shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1022)
   6539 * SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   6540                                                              (line    6)
   6541 * SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  154)
   6542 * SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  170)
   6543 * small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
   6544                                                              (line   20)
   6545 * SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
   6546                                                              (line   58)
   6547 * SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
   6548                                                              (line   54)
   6549 * SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
   6550                                                              (line   46)
   6551 * SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   6552                                                              (line    6)
   6553 * stack size:                            Options.            (line 1653)
   6554 * standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
   6555 * start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6556 * STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   79)
   6557 * strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  458)
   6558 * strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  462)
   6559 * stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line  931)
   6560 * SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
   6561                                                              (line    6)
   6562 * suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   12)
   6563 * symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  105)
   6564 * symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
   6565 * symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
   6566 * symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  522)
   6567 * symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
   6568 * symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  447)
   6569 * symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  739)
   6570 * symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
   6571 * symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line  931)
   6572 * synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line  911)
   6573 * synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
   6574 * TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
   6575 * TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   27)
   6576 * TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   32)
   6577 * thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
   6578 * TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   6579 * traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1069)
   6580 * unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  137)
   6581 * undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  480)
   6582 * undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
   6583                                                              (line   13)
   6584 * undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1225)
   6585 * uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
   6586                                                              (line    6)
   6587 * unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
   6588                                                              (line   39)
   6589 * usage:                                 Options.            (line  792)
   6590 * USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   57)
   6591 * using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   42)
   6592 * using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   22)
   6593 * Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  141)
   6594 * variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
   6595 * verbose:                               Options.            (line 1125)
   6596 * version:                               Options.            (line  507)
   6597 * version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
   6598 * version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1131)
   6599 * VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
   6600 * versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
   6601 * warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1138)
   6602 * warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1229)
   6603 * warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1225)
   6604 * weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  380)
   6605 * what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
   6606 * wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   6607                                                              (line    6)
   6608 * Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line   56)
   6609 * Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)
   6610 
   6611 
   6612 
   6613 Tag Table:
   6614 Node: Top385
   6615 Node: Overview1147
   6616 Node: Invocation2261
   6617 Node: Options2669
   6618 Node: Environment77324
   6619 Node: Scripts79084
   6620 Node: Basic Script Concepts80818
   6621 Node: Script Format83525
   6622 Node: Simple Example84388
   6623 Node: Simple Commands87484
   6624 Node: Entry Point87935
   6625 Node: File Commands88694
   6626 Node: Format Commands92560
   6627 Node: Miscellaneous Commands94526
   6628 Node: Assignments96756
   6629 Node: Simple Assignments97247
   6630 Node: PROVIDE98983
   6631 Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN100188
   6632 Node: Source Code Reference100432
   6633 Node: SECTIONS104012
   6634 Node: Output Section Description105903
   6635 Node: Output Section Name106956
   6636 Node: Output Section Address107832
   6637 Node: Input Section109481
   6638 Node: Input Section Basics110282
   6639 Node: Input Section Wildcards112634
   6640 Node: Input Section Common117367
   6641 Node: Input Section Keep118849
   6642 Node: Input Section Example119339
   6643 Node: Output Section Data120307
   6644 Node: Output Section Keywords123084
   6645 Node: Output Section Discarding126653
   6646 Node: Output Section Attributes127609
   6647 Node: Output Section Type128613
   6648 Node: Output Section LMA129767
   6649 Node: Forced Output Alignment132038
   6650 Node: Forced Input Alignment132306
   6651 Node: Output Section Region132691
   6652 Node: Output Section Phdr133121
   6653 Node: Output Section Fill133785
   6654 Node: Overlay Description134927
   6655 Node: MEMORY139175
   6656 Node: PHDRS143375
   6657 Node: VERSION148414
   6658 Node: Expressions156205
   6659 Node: Constants157083
   6660 Node: Symbols157644
   6661 Node: Orphan Sections158382
   6662 Node: Location Counter159145
   6663 Node: Operators163449
   6664 Node: Evaluation164371
   6665 Node: Expression Section165735
   6666 Node: Builtin Functions167224
   6667 Node: Implicit Linker Scripts174716
   6668 Node: Machine Dependent175491
   6669 Node: H8/300176352
   6670 Node: i960177977
   6671 Node: ARM179662
   6672 Node: HPPA ELF32182578
   6673 Node: MMIX184201
   6674 Node: MSP430185418
   6675 Node: PowerPC ELF32186466
   6676 Node: PowerPC64 ELF64188757
   6677 Node: TI COFF193171
   6678 Node: WIN32193703
   6679 Node: Xtensa211777
   6680 Node: BFD214899
   6681 Node: BFD outline216354
   6682 Node: BFD information loss217640
   6683 Node: Canonical format220157
   6684 Node: Reporting Bugs224514
   6685 Node: Bug Criteria225208
   6686 Node: Bug Reporting225907
   6687 Node: MRI232932
   6688 Node: GNU Free Documentation License237575
   6689 Node: Index257289
   6690 
   6691 End Tag Table
   6692